GE Energy Services Digital Energy Multi Host* Software Manual Software Manual NOTICE OF COPYRIGHT AND PROPRIETARY RIGHTS © 2008-2010, General Electric Canada. All rights reserved. The contents of this manual and the information contained herein are the exclusive property of General Electric Canada, except as otherwise indicated. You may not disclose, reproduce, publish, license, post, transmit or distribute this manual, in whole or in part, without the prior written permission of General Electric Canada or except as permitted by written license agreement with General Electric Canada. General Electric Canada has made every reasonable attempt to ensure the completeness and accuracy of this manual. However, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice, and does not represent a commitment on the part of General Electric Canada. Any included or attached hardware schematics and technical descriptions, or software listings that disclose source code, are for information purposes only. Reproduction, in whole or in part, to create working hardware or software for other than General Electric Canada products is strictly prohibited, except as permitted by written license agreement with General Electric Canada. TRADEMARK NOTICES * Trademarks or registered trademarks of General Electric Company and/or General Electric Canada. Access, Excel, Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other brand and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. For information on other General Electric Canada products, please contact the Customer Service: GE Energy Services Digital Energy 179 Brunswick Blvd., Pointe-Claire QC H9R 5N2, Canada Tel.: +1 514 694 3637, Fax: +1 514 694 9245 [email protected] www.ge.com/energy Customer Service Center (24 hours a day, 365 days a year): Tel.: 800 361 3652 (United States and Canada), +1 403 214 4600 (worldwide) [email protected] ii Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Multi Host SAFETY WARNINGS IN SIX LANGUAGES [EN] (in English) WARNINGS: • All procedures in this manual must be strictly adhered to. • Any deviation from these could cause irreversible damages to the transformer being monitored, the Hydran M2 or the Intellix MO150, and could lead to property damage, personal injury and/or death. • Installation and maintenance of the Hydran M2 or the Intellix MO150 must be carried out by qualified personnel only. Please advise the station operator prior to maintenance. Working inside the Hydran M2 or the Intellix MO150 may trigger unwanted alarms due to parameter changes, power shutdown, system rebooting or electrostatic discharge. • For a maximum distance of 15 m (50 ft) from the power source, use a 14-AWG (2.08 mm2) cable and an overcurrent protection. • The Hydran M2 or the Intellix MO150 is intended for industrial use and shall not be connected to the public low-voltage supply system. [FR] (in French) ATTENTION : • Toutes les procédures dans ce manuel doivent être observées rigoureusement. • Tout écart par rapport à celles-ci pourrait causer des dommages irréversibles au transformateur surveillé, au Hydran M2 ou à l’Intellix MO150, et pourrait entraîner des dommages à la propriété, des blessures corporelles et/ou la mort. • L’installation et l’entretien du Hydran M2 ou de l’Intellix MO150 doivent être effectués par du personnel qualifié seulement. Veuillez aviser l’opérateur du poste avant l’entretien. Travailler à l’intérieur du Hydran M2 ou de l’Intellix MO150 peut déclencher des alarmes non voulues en raison de changements à des paramètres, d’arrêt de l’alimentation, de remise en marche du système ou de décharge électrostatique. • Pour une distance maximale de 15 m (50 pi) de la source d’alimentation, utiliser un câble de 14 AWG (2,08 mm2) et une protection contre les surintensités. • Le Hydran M2 ou l’Intellix MO150 est destiné à un usage industriel et ne doit pas être branché au système public d’alimentation à basse tension. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 iii Software Manual [ES] (in Spanish) ADVERTENCIA: • Se debe cumplir estrictamente con todos los procedimientos señalados en este manual. • Cualquier desviación al respecto puede causar daños irreparables al transformador que está bajo monitoreo, al Hydran M2 o al Intellix MO150, asimismo puede ser causa de daños materiales, de lesiones corporales y/o de muerte. • La instalación y mantenimiento del Hydran M2 o del Intellix MO150 se reserva únicamente al personal perfectamente cualificado. Aconseje por favor a operador de la estación antes del mantenimiento. El trabajo dentro del Hydran M2 o del Intellix MO150 puede accionar alarmas indeseadas debido a los cambios del parámetro, parada de la energía, sistema que reanuda o descarga electrostática. • Para una distancia máxima de 15 m (50 pies) de la fuente de alimentación, utilice un cable de 14-AWG (2,08 mm2) y una protección contra las sobrecargas de corriente. • El Hydran M2 o el Intellix MO150 se piensa para el uso industrial y no será conectado con el sistema de fuente de baja tensión público. [DE] (in German) WARNUNG: • Alle Abläufe in diesem Handbuch müssen strengstens befolgt werden. • Jede Abweichung davon könnte dem zu überwachenden Transformator, dem Hydran M2 oder dem Intellix MO150 unwiderrufliche Schäden zufügen, und könnte zu Sachschaden, Personenverletzung und/oder Tod führen. • Installation und Wartung des Hydran M2 oder des Intellix MO150 dürfen daher nur von qualifiziertem Personal durchgeführt werden. Verständigen Sie bitte den Bediener der Schaltanlage vor der Wartung. Das Arbeiten innerhalb des Hydran M2 oder des Intellix MO150 kann aufgrund von Parameteränderungen, Spannungsabschaltung, Neubooten des Systems oder elektrostatischer Entladung unerwartete Alarme auslösen. • Für eine maximale Entfernung von 15 m von der Spannungsquelle, verwenden Sie ein 14 AWG Kabel (2,08 mm2) und ein Überstromschutz. • Der Hydran M2 oder der Intellix MO150 ist für industriellen Einsatz vorgesehen und soll nicht an das öffentliche Niederspannungs-Versorgungssystem angeschlossen werden. iv Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Multi Host [IT] (in Italian) ATTENZIONE: • Tutte le procedure del presente manuale dovranno essere eseguite in totale conformità. • Qualsiasi deviazione dallo stesso manuale potrebbe causare danni irreversibili al trasformatore sotto monitoraggio, o all’ Hydran M2 o all’ Intellix MO150, e potrebbe causare danni alla proprietà, lesioni personali e/o alla morte. • L’installazione e la manutenzione del Hydran M2 o del Intellix MO150 devono essere eseguite solo ed esclusivamente da personale qualificato. Avissare l’operatore della stazione prima di manutenzione. Funzionando all’interno del Hydran M2 o del Intellix MO150 può fare scattare degli alarmi indesiderabili e cambiamenti dei parametri, arresto dell’alimentazione, un “reboot” del sistema o scarico elettrostatico. • A una distanza massima di 15 m dalla fonte di energia usare un cavo 14-AWG (2.08 mm2) e una protezione di sovracorrente. • L’intenzione del Hydran M2 o del Intellix MO150 è per uso industriale e a non collegare al sistema di bassa tensione pubblico. [SV] (in Swedish) VARNING: • Alla procedurer i manualen måste följas noggrant. • Varje avvikelse från dessa procedurer kan orsaka oåterkalleliga skador på den övervakade transformatorn, på Hydran M2 eller på Intellix MO150 samt leda till egendomsförlust, personskada och/eller livsfara. • Installation och underhåll av Hydran M2 eller av Intellix MO150 måste utföras av behörig personal. Råd var god posterar operatören före underhåll. Funktionsduglig insida Hydran M2 eller Intellix MO150 kan starta oönskade parameterändringar för larm tack vare, driver avstängning, systemomstart eller elektrostatisk urladdning. • För ett maximalt avstånd på 15 m från kraftuttaget, använd 2,08 mm2 kabel (14-AWG) och ett överströmsskydd. • Hydran M2 eller Intellix MO150 ämnas för industriellt bruk och förbinds inte till det offentliga tillförselsystemet för låg spänning. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 v Software Manual SAFETY SYMBOLS Meaning of safety symbols used on the Hydran M2 or the Intellix MO150: Refer to the Software Manual to prevent injury or damage to equipment. Hazardous voltages may be present. Protective earth connection. Meaning of safety messages used in this Software Manual: CAUTION CAUTION A procedure, practice, or condition could cause equipment damage or permanent loss of data. WARNING CAUTION A procedure, practice, or condition could cause bodily injury or death. vi Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Multi Host PREFACE This manual provides installation, configuration and operation instructions for the Multi Host software included with the Hydran M2 or the Intellix MO150. See the Hydran M2 Instruction Manual or the Intellix MO150 Instruction Manual for additional information. The information in this manual may be used by: • • • • • A purchaser/specifier An installer A maintenance technician An engineer/designer An operator WARNING CAUTION All procedures in this manual must be strictly adhered to. Any deviation from these could cause irreversible damages to the transformer being monitored, the Hydran M2 or the Intellix MO150, and could lead to property damage, personal injury and/or death. Installation and maintenance of the Hydran M2 or the Intellix MO150 must be carried out by qualified personnel only. This manual is not a tutorial on combustible gases or water in dielectric oil. It is assumed that the reader is already familiar with these subjects. Some knowledge of Microsoft Windows* would be helpful but is not required. This manual is written for the 0–2,000 ppm operating range only. This range is the one used by most Hydran M2 or Intellix MO150 units. Should your unit(s) use a different operating range, please convert the values (in doubt, contact the General Electric Canada Customer Service; the coordinates can be found at the bottom of page ii). A Table of Contents and a List of Figures are present at the beginning of the manual, along with a Glossary in Appendix F. The name of menus, options, parameters, etc. shown on the screen of the Multi Host software are displayed in bold characters; for example: the Network Survey window. The Multi Host’s menus and options can be embedded; to indicate the path to a submenu, an option or a parameter, the symbol “>” is used to separate each step towards this item. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 vii Software Manual The Multi Host Software Manual and the appropriate Instruction Manual are located in PDF format in the English > Manuals folder of the installation CD. Hard copies of both manuals can be purchased from General Electric Canada. viii Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Multi Host DATES OF REVISIONS All pages in this manual are labeled “Rev. 7, December 2010” since they all have been modified during this general revision. Issue dates of this manual are: Original (Rev. 1) . . . . . . . .June 2008 Revision 2 . . . . . . . . September 2008 Revision 3 . . . . . . . . December 2008 Revision 4 . . . . . . . . . . .August 2009 Revision 5 . . . . . . . . . February 2010 Revision 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . .May 2010 Revision 7 . . . . . . . . December 2010 Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 ix Software Manual PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK x Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Multi Host STANDARD GENERAL ELECTRIC CANADA WARRANTY The products covered by this manual and manufactured by General Electric Canada (“Products”) are warranted to be free from defects in material, workmanship and title at the time of delivery. Any components of a Product or other products manufactured by persons other than General Electric Canada carry only the warranty provided by the manufacturers thereof and General Electric Canada gives no warranty on behalf of the manufacturers of such products. General Electric Canada warrants the Products until 36 months from date of delivery (“Warranty Period”). General Electric Canada represents and warrants that any software and firmware covered by this manual is free from functional deficiencies. If any functional deficiencies are discovered and are reported to General Electric Canada within the Warranty Period, General Electric Canada agrees to use due diligence to correct such deficiencies within 30 days after receipt of such notification. Upon receiving such notice, General Electric Canada may lend telephone support or patches. If the reported deficiencies cannot be eliminated within 30 days, the Buyer may request, and General Electric Canada shall then furnish, monthly status reports to the Buyer regarding the progress of General Electric Canada’s efforts to correct such functional deficiencies. If Products covered by this manual do not meet the above warranties during the applicable Warranty Period, the Buyer shall promptly notify General Electric Canada in writing but not later than 30 days and make the Products available promptly for correction. General Electric Canada shall thereupon correct any defect by, at its option, repairing the defective Products or making available necessary replacement parts. Any failure which is the basis for a warranty claim shall not be cause for extension of the duration of the applicable Warranty Period. General Electric Canada shall not be responsible for removal or replacement of systems, structures or other parts of the Buyer’s facility. If a defect in Products or part thereof cannot be corrected by General Electric Canada’s reasonable efforts, the parties shall negotiate an equitable adjustment in price with respect to such Products or part thereof. All decontamination work necessary for the correction of defects shall be performed by the Buyer at the Buyer’s expense. The condition of any tests shall be mutually agreed upon and General Electric Canada shall be notified of and may be represented at all tests that may be made. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 xi Software Manual General Electric Canada does not warrant Products or any repaired or replacement parts against normal wear and tear, including that due to environment or operation, including excessive operation at peak capability, frequent starting, type of fuel, detrimental air inlet conditions, or erosion, corrosion or material deposits from fluids, or which have been involved in an accident. The warranties and remedies set forth herein are further conditioned upon: • Proper storage, installation, operation and maintenance of the Buyer’s equipment and conformance with the instruction manuals (including revisions thereto) provided by General Electric Canada and/or its subcontractors, as applicable • Repair or modification pursuant to General Electric Canada’s instructions or approval The Buyer shall keep proper records of operation and maintenance during the applicable Warranty Period. These records shall be kept in the form of log sheets and copies shall be submitted to General Electric Canada upon its request in connection with a warranty claim by the Buyer. General Electric Canada does not warrant any products or services of others designated by the Buyer where such products or services are not normally supplied by General Electric Canada. The preceding paragraphs set forth the exclusive remedies for all claims based on failure of or defect in Products covered by this manual, whether the failure or defect arises before or during the applicable Warranty Period and whether a claim, however instituted, is based on contract, indemnity, warranty, tort (including negligence) or civil liability, strict liability or otherwise. The foregoing warranties are exclusive and are in lieu of all other warranties and guarantees whether written, oral, implied or statutory. NO IMPLIED STATUTORY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SHALL APPLY. xii Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Multi Host TABLE OF CONTENTS Notice of Copyright and Proprietary Rights Trademark Notices . . . . . . . . . . Safety Warnings in Six Languages . . . . Safety Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dates of Revisions . . . . . . . . . . Standard General Electric Canada Warranty Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii . . ii . . iii . . vi . . vii . . ix . . xi . .xiii . .xxi . xxvii Chapter 1 Software Installation 1.1 System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Contents of the Installation CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 Upgrading the Controller Board Embedded Program . . . . . . . . 1.4 Installing the Multi Host Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 Installing the Multi Host Application in Windows Vista and Windows 7 1.6 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 .1-2 .1-2 .1-3 1-10 1-15 Chapter 2 Managing Device Connections 2.1 Starting the Multi Host Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Configuring the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.1 Hierarchical Network Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.2 Adding a Communication Server . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.3 Adding a Power Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.4 Adding a Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3.5 Deleting a Communication Server, a Power Station or a Device 2.3.6 Updating the Communication Server . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Working On-Line or Off-Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.1 Changing Working Mode for Power Stations . . . . . . . 2.4.2 Connecting and Disconnecting Devices . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 .2-2 .2-3 .2-3 .2-5 .2-7 .2-8 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-13 2-14 2-15 Chapter 3 Buttons and Menus 3.1 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 xiii Software Manual 3.2 File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.1 All History Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.2 Print Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.3 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 View Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.1 Network View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2 Real Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2.1 Actual Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2.2 Maximum Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.2.3 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3.1 Real Time Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.3.2 Historic Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.4 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.4.1 Viewing History in Grid Format . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3.4.2 Viewing Short or Long Term History in Graphical Format . 3.3.4.3 Exporting History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.1 Network View Parameter Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2.1 Input-Output Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2.2 Alarm Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2.3 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2.4 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2.5 Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.2.6 Idle Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.3 Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.3.1 Relay Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.3.2 Alarm Level-1 Indicator Mode (Only for the Intellix MO150) 3.4.3.3 Alarm Level-2 Indicator Mode (Only for the Intellix MO150) 3.4.4 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.4.1 View Service Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4.4.2 Change Cooling Banks (Only for the Intellix MO150) . . . 3.4.4.3 Enclosure Heater (Only for the Intellix MO150) . . . . . 3.4.5 Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 Options Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.1 Embedded Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5.2 Automatic Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 Help Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv Rev. 7, December 2010 . 3-3 . 3-3 . 3-4 . 3-4 . 3-4 . 3-6 . 3-11 . 3-11 . 3-15 . 3-18 . 3-19 . 3-20 . 3-23 . 3-26 . 3-27 . 3-30 . 3-32 . 3-34 . 3-34 . 3-36 . 3-38 . 3-46 . 3-53 . 3-55 . 3-58 . 3-58 . 3-60 . 3-62 . 3-63 . 3-64 . 3-64 . 3-66 . 3-70 . 3-70 . 3-71 . 3-72 . 3-72 . 3-72 . 3-75 . 3-76 Part 18415 Multi Host Chapter 4 Model Inputs and Selection 4.1 Inputs Required for Each Model 4.1.1 Assigning Inputs . . . 4.1.2 Input Alarms . . . . 4.2 Model Selection . . . . . . 4.2.1 Real Time Values . . 4.2.2 Historic Values . . . 4.3 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1 .4-3 .4-4 .4-4 .4-5 .4-5 .4-7 Chapter 5 Commands Common to All Model Windows and Graphs 5.1 Analog Signal Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Digital Signal Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Vertical Scales for Analog Signals . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Vertical Scales for Digital Signals . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 Horizontal Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1 .5-2 .5-3 .5-3 .5-4 .5-4 .5-5 Chapter 6 Apparent Power Model 6.1 Model Inputs . . . . 6.2 Parameters to Configure 6.3 Model Outputs . . . . 6.4 Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2 .6-2 .6-2 .6-3 Chapter 7 Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Model 7.1 Model Inputs . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Parameters to Configure . . . . . . 7.3 Model Outputs . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Associated Alarms . . . . . . . . 7.5 Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2 .7-3 .7-4 .7-4 .7-5 Chapter 8 Insulation Aging Model 8.1 Model Inputs . . . . 8.2 Parameters to Configure 8.3 Model Outputs . . . . 8.4 Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2 .8-3 .8-4 .8-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part 18415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rev. 7, December 2010 xv Software Manual Chapter 9 Moisture and Bubbling Model 9.1 Model Inputs . . . . . . . 9.2 Parameters to Configure . . 9.3 Model Outputs . . . . . . 9.4 Associated Alarms . . . . 9.5 Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 10 Moisture Content in Insulating Barrier Model 10.1 Model Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 Parameters to Configure If No Bottom Oil Measurement Is Available 10.3 Model Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4 Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 . 10-2 . 10-4 . 10-4 Chapter 11 Dynamic Loading Model 11.1 Model Inputs . . . . . 11.2 Parameters to Configure 11.3 Model Outputs . . . . 11.4 Associated Alarms . . 11.5 Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 . 11-3 . 11-5 . 11-6 . 11-6 Chapter 12 Cooling Efficiency Model 12.1 Model Inputs . . . . . 12.2 Parameters to Configure 12.3 Model Outputs . . . . 12.4 Associated Alarms . . 12.5 Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 . 12-2 . 12-4 . 12-5 . 12-5 Chapter 13 Cooling Control Model 13.1 Model Inputs . . . . . 13.2 Parameters to Configure 13.3 Model Processing . . . 13.4 Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 . 13-3 . 13-4 . 13-5 xvi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rev. 7, December 2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-4 9-5 Part 18415 Multi Host Chapter 14 OLTC Tap Position Model 14.1 Model Inputs . . . . . 14.2 Parameters to Configure . 14.3 Model Outputs . . . . . 14.4 Associated Alarms . . . 14.5 Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 14-3 14-4 14-5 14-6 Chapter 15 OLTC Temperature Differential Model 15.1 Model Inputs . . . . . . . . . . 15.2 Parameters to Configure . . . . . . 15.3 Model Outputs . . . . . . . . . . 15.4 Associated Alarms . . . . . . . . 15.5 Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2 15-2 15-2 15-3 15-3 Chapter 16 Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommendations Module 16.1 Activation Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2 16.2 Access via the Alarms Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 16.3 Access via the Network View Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5 Chapter 17 Troubleshooting 17.1 Communication Between the Multi Host Software and a Device Cannot Be Established . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.1 Time-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.2 Connection Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.3 Wrong Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.4 Wrong Device Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1.5 Unable to Connect to All Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2 History Download Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.1 File Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2.2 History Not Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1 17-1 17-2 17-3 17-3 17-3 17-4 17-4 17-4 Appendix A Software License for the Multi Host Software Appendix B Alarm Conditions and Advice Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 xvii Software Manual Appendix C Models Configuration Guide C.1 Input Plugin Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1.1 Temperature Sensor Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1.2 Current Sensor Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1.3 Tap Position Sensor Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2 Alarm Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.1 Top Oil Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.2 Winding Hot-Spot Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.3 Water-Oil Condensation Temperature . . . . . . . . . . C.2.4 Bubbling Temperature Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.5 Tap Position Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.6 OLTC Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.2.7 Cooling Efficiency Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3 Models Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.1 Moisture Reading Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.2 Winding Current Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.3 Apparent Power Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.4 Winding Hot-Spot Temperature and Transformer Type Setup C.3.5 Insulation Aging Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.6 Moisture and Bubbling Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.7 Moisture Content in Barrier Setup . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.8 Cooling Efficiency Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.9 Cooling Banks Status Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.10 Cooling Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.10.1 Load Current Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.10.2 Top Oil Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.10.3 Winding Hot-Spot Input . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.11 Tap Position Tracking Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.12 OLTC Temperature Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.13 Dynamic Loading Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.3.13.1 Group 1: Dynamic Loading Setup . . . . . . . C.3.13.2 Group 2: Accessories Characteristics . . . . . . C.3.13.3 Group 3: Overload Limits . . . . . . . . . . C.4 Models Configuration Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1 . C-4 . C-7 .C-11 .C-12 .C-14 .C-16 .C-18 .C-19 .C-20 .C-21 .C-23 .C-24 .C-26 .C-28 .C-29 .C-30 .C-37 .C-39 .C-40 .C-45 .C-49 .C-50 .C-52 .C-54 .C-55 .C-56 .C-58 .C-59 .C-60 .C-64 .C-65 .C-67 Appendix D Database Upgrade D.1 Backing up the Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2 D.2 Removing the Old Multi Host and the Host Databases . . . . . . . . . . D-2 D.3 Installing the Most Recent Multi Host . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 xviii Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Multi Host D.4 Upgrading the Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3 D.5 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5 D.6 Log File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6 Appendix E Alarm Messages Appendix F Glossary Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 xix Software Manual PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK xx Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Multi Host LIST OF FIGURES Figure 1-1 - InstallShield Wizard Box . . . . . . Figure 1-2 - Welcome Box . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-3 - Exit Setup Box . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-4 - Select Options Box . . . . . . . . Figure 1-5 - Choose Destination Location Box . . . Figure 1-6 - Start Copying Files Box . . . . . . Figure 1-7 - Setup Status Progress Box . . . . . . Figure 1-8 - InstallShield Wizard Complete Box . . Figure 1-9 - Setup Step in Windows Vista . . . . Figure 1-10 - cmd Step in Windows Vista . . . . . Figure 1-11 - Command Prompt . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-12 - comctl32.ocx Succeeded Message Box . Figure 1-13 - Multi Host Step in Windows Vista . . Figure 1-14 - Typical Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3 .1-4 .1-4 .1-5 .1-6 .1-7 .1-8 .1-9 1-10 1-11 1-12 1-12 1-13 1-14 Figure 2-1 - Splash Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-2 - Password Screen Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-3 - System Manager Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-4 - Adding a Communication Server in the System Manager Window . Figure 2-5 - Computer Names Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-6 - Adding a Power Station in the System Manager Window . . . . Figure 2-7 - Adding a Device in the System Manager Window . . . . . . . Figure 2-8 - Remove Communication Server? Confirmation Box . . . . . . Figure 2-9 - Power Station Does Not Exist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-10 - Device Deleted Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-11 - Exit Current Working Mode? Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-12 - Device Connect/Disconnect Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-13 - Power Station ID and Device ID Do Not Correspond Message Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1 .2-3 .2-4 .2-5 .2-6 .2-7 .2-9 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-14 2-14 2-15 Figure 3-1 Figure 3-2 Figure 3-3 Figure 3-4 Figure 3-5 Figure 3-6 Figure 3-7 - . . . . . . . .3-1 .3-2 .3-5 .3-6 .3-6 .3-7 .3-7 Part 18415 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All History Download Progress Box . . . . . Exit the Application? Box . . . . . . . . . Network View Parameters Not Configured Box Network View Window for a Power Station . . Reading Values Progress Box . . . . . . . Rev. 7, December 2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi Software Manual Figure 3-8 - Network View Window for a Hydran M2 . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-9 - Network View Window for an Intellix MO150 . . . . . . . . Figure 3-10 - Active Alarms Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-11 - Reading Actual Values Progress Box . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-12 - Inputs Tab of the Actual Values Window for a Hydran M2 . . . Figure 3-13 - Models Tab of the Actual Values Window . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-14 - Reading Maximum Values Progress Box . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-15 - Maximum Values Window for a Hydran M2 . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-16 - Maximum Values Window for an Intellix MO150 . . . . . . Figure 3-17 - Alarms Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-18 - View Models Window With Real-Time Values . . . . . . . Figure 3-19 - Select Inputs Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-20 - Maximum Ten Items Allowed Box . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-21 - Typical Custom Screen Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-22 - View Models Window With Historic Values . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-23 - Download History? Confirmation Box . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-24 - History Download Progress Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-25 - History Not Available Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-26 - History Options Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-27 - Proceeding to Download Missing Records Box . . . . . . . . Figure 3-28 - Short Term or Long Term History Grid . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-29 - Other History Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-30 - History Options Box in Graphical Format . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-31 - History Options Box in Export Format . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-32 - Exported History Message Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-33 - Loading Network View Parameter Selection Values Progress Box Figure 3-34 - Network View Parameter Selection Window . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-35 - Maximum Five Items Allowed Box . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-36 - Loading Device Data Progress Box . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-37 - Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-38 - Save Values? Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-39 - Expanded Input-Output Setup Tree for a Hydran M2 . . . . . Figure 3-40 - Expanded Input-Output Setup Tree for an Intellix MO150 Without Hydran S2’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-41 - Expanded Input-Output Setup Tree for an Intellix MO150 With Hydran S2(’s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-42 - Configuration Box for an Analog Input From the I/O Card . . . Figure 3-43 - Configuration Box for an Analog User-Defined Input . . . . . xxii Rev. 7, December 2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 . 3-9 . 3-10 . 3-11 . 3-12 . 3-14 . 3-15 . 3-16 . 3-17 . 3-18 . 3-20 . 3-21 . 3-22 . 3-23 . 3-24 . 3-25 . 3-25 . 3-26 . 3-26 . 3-28 . 3-29 . 3-30 . 3-31 . 3-33 . 3-34 . 3-34 . 3-35 . 3-36 . 3-36 . 3-37 . 3-38 . 3-39 . . 3-40 . . 3-41 . . 3-43 . . 3-44 Part 18415 Multi Host Figure 3-44 - Configuration Box for a Digital Input From the I/O Card . . . Figure 3-45 - Configuration Box for the Digital Inputs From the Plug-in Cards Figure 3-46 - Configuration Box for a Current Input . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-47 - Expanded Alarm Setup Tree for a Hydran M2 . . . . . . . . Figure 3-48 - Expanded Alarm Setup Tree for an Intellix MO150 Without Hydran S2’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-49 - Expanded Alarm Setup Tree for an Intellix MO150 With Hydran S2(’s) 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-50 - Configuration Box for the Battery Alarm . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-51 - Configuration Box for the System Fault Triggers . . . . . . . Figure 3-52 - Configuration Box for Alarms for User-Defined Analog Inputs . Figure 3-53 - Configuration Box for Using a User-Defined Analog Reading in a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-54 - Configuration Box for Using a User-Defined Digital Reading in a Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-55 - Configuration Box for Clear History . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-56 - Typical Download History Before Clearing? Box . . . . . . Figure 3-57 - History Cleared Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-58 - Configuration Box for History Log Rate . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-59 - Configuration Box for Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-60 - Configuration Box for the Idle Menu for a Hydran M2 . . . . Figure 3-61 - Configuration Box for the Idle Menu for an Intellix MO150 . . Figure 3-62 - Test Window for a Hydran M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-63 - Test Window for an Intellix MO150 . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-64 - Configuration Box for the Relay Test for an Intellix MO150 . . Figure 3-65 - Configuration Box for the Alarm Level-1 Test . . . . . . . . Figure 3-66 - Configuration Box for the Alarm Level-2 Test . . . . . . . . Figure 3-67 - Service Window for a Hydran M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-68 - Service Window for an Intellix MO150 . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-69 - Configuration Box for the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-70 - Configuration Box for the Sensor Information . . . . . . . . Figure 3-71 - Configuration Box for the Configuration Version Tracking . . . Figure 3-72 - Configuration Box for the Casing Temperature . . . . . . . Figure 3-73 - Configuration Box for the Casing Heater . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-74 - Configuration Box for Change Cooling Banks . . . . . . . . Figure 3-75 - Configuration Box for the Enclosure Heater . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-76 - Display Settings Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-77 - Embedded Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 . . . . . . . . 3-44 3-45 3-46 3-47 . . 3-48 . . . . . . . . .-49 3-50 3-51 3-52 . . 3-53 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54 3-55 3-56 3-56 3-57 3-58 3-59 3-59 3-61 3-62 3-63 3-64 3-64 3-65 3-66 3-67 3-68 3-68 3-69 3-69 3-70 3-70 3-71 3-72 xxiii Software Manual Figure 3-78 - Automatic Download Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73 Figure 3-79 - About Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 Figure 4-1 - View Models Window With Real-Time Values . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Figure 4-2 - View Models Window With Historic Values . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Figure 5-1 - Typical Graph Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Figure 5-2 - Analog Signal Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Figure 5-3 - Digital Signal Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Figure 6-1 - Summary of the Apparent Power Model . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Figure 6-2 - Main Window for the Apparent Power Model . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Figure 7-1 - Summary of the Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Model . . . . . . 7-2 Figure 7-2 - Main Window for the Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Model . . . . 7-5 Figure 8-1 - Summary of the Insulation Aging Model . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Figure 8-2 - Main Window for the Insulation Aging Model . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Figure 9-1 - Summary of the Moisture and Bubbling Model . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Figure 9-2 - Main Window for the Moisture and Bubbling Model . . . . . . . 9-5 Figure 10-1 - Summary of the Moisture Content in Insulating Barrier Model . . . 10-2 Figure 11-1 - Summary of the Dynamic Loading Model . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Figure 11-2 - Dynamic Loading Model Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Figure 11-3 - Main Window for the Dynamic Loading Model . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Figure 12-1 - Summary of the Cooling Efficiency Model . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Figure 12-2 - Main Window for the Cooling Efficiency Model . . . . . . . . . 12-6 Figure 13-1 - Summary of the Cooling Control Model . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Figure 13-2 - Main Window for the Cooling Control Model . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Figure 14-1 - Summary of the OLTC Tap Position Model . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Figure 14-2 - Main Window for the OLTC Tap Position Model . . . . . . . . . 14-6 Figure 15-1 - Summary of the OLTC Temperature Differential Model . . . . . . 15-2 xxiv Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Multi Host Figure 15-2 - Main Window for the OLTC Temperature Differential Model . . . 15-4 Figure 16-1 - Alarms Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3 Figure 16-2 - Typical Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommended Action Box . . . 16-4 Figure 16-3 - Active Alarms Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5 Figure 17-1 - Timeout Occured Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1 Figure 17-2 - Connection Open Failed Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2 Figure 17-3 - Connect Appropriate Device Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4 Figure C-1 - Setup Menu for the Hydran M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-2 - Setup Menu for the Intellix MO150 . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-3 - Temperature Sensor Assignation Panel for the Hydran M2 . . Figure C-4 - Temperature Sensor Assignation Panel for the Intellix MO150 Figure C-5 - Temperature Sensor Calibration Menu for the Hydran M2 . . Figure C-6 - Temperature Sensor Calibration Menu for the Intellix MO150 Figure C-7 - Temperature Sensor Calibration Panel . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-8 - Current Sensor Assignation Panel for the Hydran M2 . . . . Figure C-9 - Current Menu for the Hydran M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-10 - Current Menu for the Intellix MO150 . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-11 - Current Settings Panel for the Hydran M2 . . . . . . . . Figure C-12 - Current Settings Panel for the Intellix MO150 . . . . . . . Figure C-13 - Tap Position Sensor Assignation Panel for the Hydran M2 . . Figure C-14 - Tap Position Sensor Assignation Panel for the Intellix MO150 Figure C-15 - Tap Position Settings Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-16 - Alarm Setup Menu for the Hydran M2 . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-17 - Alarm Setup Menu for the Intellix MO150 . . . . . . . . Figure C-18 - Top Oil Temperature Alarm Settings Panel . . . . . . . . Figure C-19 - Hot-Spot Temperature Alarm Settings Panel . . . . . . . Figure C-20 - Water-Oil Condensation Temperature Alarm Settings Panel . Figure C-21 - Bubbling Temperature Margin Alarm Settings Panel . . . . Figure C-22 - Tap Position Tracking Alarm Settings Panel . . . . . . . Figure C-23 - OLTC Temperature Long Term Alarm Settings Panel . . . . Figure C-24 - OLTC Temperature Short Term Alarm Settings Panel . . . . Figure C-25 - Cooling Efficiency Index Alarm Settings Panel . . . . . . Figure C-26 - Models Setup Menu for the Hydran M2 . . . . . . . . . Figure C-27 - Models Setup Menu for the Intellix MO150 . . . . . . . . Figure C-28 - Moisture Reading Setup Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2 C-3 C-4 C-4 C-5 C-6 C-6 C-7 C-8 C-9 C-10 C-10 C-11 C-11 C-12 C-13 C-14 C-15 C-17 C-18 C-19 C-20 C-22 C-22 C-24 C-25 C-26 C-27 xxv Software Manual Figure C-29 - Winding Current Setup Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-30 - Apparent Power Setup Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-31 - WHST and Transformer Type Setup Panel for the Hydran M2 . . Figure C-32 - WHST and Transformer Type Setup Panel for the Intellix MO150 Figure C-33 - IEC Thermal Diagram (Adapted for Configuration Purpose) . . Figure C-34 - Insulation Aging Setup Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-35 - Moisture and Bubbling Setup Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-36 - Moisture Content in Barrier Setup Panel . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-37 - Cooling Efficiency Setup Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-38 - Cooling Banks Status Setup Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-39 - Cooling Control Setup Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-40 - Cooling Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-41 - Load Current Input Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-42 - Top Oil Input Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-43 - Winding Hot-Spot Input Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-44 - Tap Position Tracking Setup Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-45 - OLTC Temperature Setup Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-46 - Dynamic Loading Model Setup Window . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-47 - Group 1: Dynamic Loading Setup Panel . . . . . . . . . . Figure C-48 - Group 2: Accessories Characteristics Setup Panel . . . . . . . Figure C-49 - Group 3: Overload Limits Setup Panel . . . . . . . . . . . Figure D-1 - Database Upgrade Window xxvi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-28 .C-29 .C-30 .C-31 .C-34 .C-37 .C-40 .C-41 .C-45 .C-49 .C-50 .C-52 .C-53 .C-54 .C-55 .C-56 .C-58 .C-59 .C-60 .C-64 .C-65 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Multi Host LIST OF TABLES Table 2-1 - Password Levels and Available Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . Table 2-2 - On-Line Versus Off-Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Table 4-1 - Required and Optional Inputs for Each Model . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 2-1 4-2 Table 9-1 - Minimum, Maximum and Default Values for the Factors A, B and C . 9-3 Table 14-1 - Lowest, Middle and Maximum Taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Table 16-1 - Availability of DPR for Active Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2 Table B-1 - Alarm Conditions and Advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 Table C-1 Table C-2 Table C-3 Table C-4 Table C-5 Table C-6 Table C-7 Table C-8 - Top Oil Temperature Alarm Set Points . . . . . Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Alarm Set Points . Rated Hot-spot Temperature for Normal Aging . . Height of Oil Above the Hot-spot Area . . . . . Oil Exponent at Cooling Stages . . . . . . . . Converted Designation for Cooling Modes. . . . Tap Position Designations . . . . . . . . . . Models Configuration Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16 C-17 C-38 C-40 C-42 C-50 C-57 C-67 Table E-1 - Alarm Messages on the Hydran M2 or Intellix MO150 Display and on the Multi Host Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1 Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 xxvii Software Manual PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK xxviii Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Chapter 1 Software Installation This Chapter explains how to install the Multi Host software on a PC. Network installation is not supported, so you must install the software on each PC that will be running the Multi Host software. You may install the software on as many PC’s as you need. There are two components to install: the Communication Server, and the Multi Host (Section 1.4 on page 1-3). Note: If you need to upgrade the controller board embedded program of your existing Hydran M2 With Models devices and if a version of the Multi Host software is installed on your PC, please see Section 1.3 on page 1-2. The general installation procedure is as follows: 1. Read the License Agreement in Appendix A. 2. Check the system requirements in Section 1.1 on page 1-2. 3. Close all applications on the PC. 4. Insert the installation CD into the CD-ROM drive. 5. Open the Installation Program. 6. If using the default directory, which is recommended, click Next four times, and then Finish. For details on the installation procedure, see Section 1.4 on page 1-3. Note: In Microsoft Windows 2000 settings (Control Panel > Display > Appearance menu), select the Windows Standard under the Scheme list in order to get full window’s title. Do not load the Multi Host software in the DOS environment. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 1-1 Chapter 1 • Software Installation 1.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS • PC with Microsoft Windows, recommended Pentium III, 1 GHz, 256 MB of available RAM memory • Hard disk with 2 GB of free space plus 0.4 MB per Hydran M2 or Intellix MO150 per month • Display mode resolution (pixels): XGA (1024 x 768), SXGA (1280 x 1024), or UXGA (1600 x 1200) • Microsoft Windows-compatible printer (optional) • Microsoft Windows 2000, XP, Vista or Windows 7 • .NET Framework 2.0 or later installed prior to Multi Host installation • Null-modem serial cable Note: The Multi Host software has only been tested with the English version of Microsoft Windows. 1.2 CONTENTS OF THE INSTALLATION CD The Multi Host package contains an installation CD that includes: • • • • The Multi Host software The latest version of the embedded programs (firmware) The Multi Host Software Manual (this manual) in PDF format The Hydran M2 Instruction Manual or the Intellix MO150 Instruction Manual in PDF format • Additional software tools: AppProg and .NET Framework 2.0 1.3 UPGRADING THE CONTROLLER BOARD EMBEDDED PROGRAM If you need to upgrade the controller board embedded program of your existing Hydran M2 With Models devices and if a version of the Multi Host software is installed on your PC, please proceed as follows prior to any Hydran M2 With Models’ controller firmware upgrade to the latest version: 1. Connect into your Hydran M2 With Models units, using your installed Multi Host application. 2. Download the complete set of historic data acquired by the Hydran M2 With Models devices (see Section 3.2.1 on page 3-3). 1-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Installing the Multi Host Application 3. Upgrade the latest controller firmware (see Appendix F of the Instruction Manual for the Hydran M2 With Models). 4. Upgrade the Multi Host application (see Section 1.4 on page 1-3). 1.4 INSTALLING THE MULTI HOST APPLICATION WARNING CAUTION If a previous version (1.2 or 1.3) of the Multi Host software is already installed on your PC, the procedure in Appendix D must be used to install the new version 1.4. Not doing so could result in loss of data and various compatibility problems such as buttons not being visible. Note: If the Multi Host application is installed in Windows Vista or Windows 7, use the procedure in Section 1.5 on page 1-10 instead. This procedure shows how to install the Multi Host application with its Communication Server. Note: You may install the software on as many PC’s as needed. 1. Open the Installation Program. The InstallShield Wizard box shown in Figure 1-1 on page 1-3 appears. Figure 1-1 - InstallShield Wizard Box • To quit the installation procedure, click Cancel. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 1-3 Chapter 1 • Software Installation 2. The Multi Host Welcome box shown in Figure 1-2 on page 1-4 is displayed. Figure 1-2 - Welcome Box • To continue, click Next >. • To quit the installation procedure, click Cancel or the X in the top right corner. The Exit Setup box shown in Figure 1-3 on page 1-4 appears. Figure 1-3 - Exit Setup Box 1-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Installing the Multi Host Application – To exit the installation procedure, click Yes. – To continue, click No. 3. The Multi Host Select Options box shown in Figure 1-4 on page 1-5 is displayed. Figure 1-4 - Select Options Box • Check [] both Multi Host and Communication Server. • To continue, click Next >. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 1-5 Chapter 1 • Software Installation 4. The Multi Host Choose Destination Location box shown in Figure 1-5 on page 1-6 is used to select the destination folder for the Multi Host software files. Figure 1-5 - Choose Destination Location Box • • • • • To return to the previous screen, click < Back. To quit the installation procedure, click Cancel or the X in the top right corner. The default destination folder is C:\Program Files\. To select another folder, click Browse.... When the desired folder is indicated in the Destination Folder area, click Next >. The default or selected folder is created if it does not exist. Note: It is strongly recommended to accept the default destination folder. 1-6 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Installing the Multi Host Application 5. The installation program has now collected enough information to start copying the Multi Host software files into the destination folder. The Multi Host Start Copying Files box shown in Figure 1-6 on page 1-7 presents the current settings. Figure 1-6 - Start Copying Files Box • To quit the installation procedure, click Cancel or the X in the top right corner. • To modify any setting, click < Back. • If you are satisfied with the settings, click Next > to begin copying the files into the destination folder. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 1-7 Chapter 1 • Software Installation 6. The Multi Host Setup Status progress box shown in Figure 1-7 on page 1-8 appears. Figure 1-7 - Setup Status Progress Box • To quit the installation procedure, click Cancel or the X in the top right corner. 1-8 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Installing the Multi Host Application 7. After all Multi Host software files have been successfully copied into your computer, the Multi Host InstallShield Wizard Complete box shown in Figure 1-8 on page 1-9 is displayed. Figure 1-8 - InstallShield Wizard Complete Box • Click Finish. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 1-9 Chapter 1 • Software Installation 1.5 INSTALLING THE MULTI HOST APPLICATION IN WINDOWS VISTA AND WINDOWS 7 In Windows Vista and Windows 7, the Multi Host application can only be installed and operated correctly if the user has Administrator rights on the PC where it is installed. Proceed as follows: 1. In Figure 1-9 on page 1-10, right-click Setup. Figure 1-9 - Setup Step in Windows Vista 2. 1-10 To install the Multi Host application with administrator privileges, select Run as administrator. Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Installing the Multi Host Application in Windows Vista and Windows 7 3. Wait for the installation to complete. 4. Once the installation is finished, click the Windows Start logo. 5. In Figure 1-10 on page 1-11, type cmd at the bottom. Figure 1-10 - cmd Step in Windows Vista 6. Right-click cmd at the top. 7. Select Run as administrator. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 1-11 Chapter 1 • Software Installation 8. Open the Command Prompt, shown in Figure 1-11 on page 1-12. Figure 1-11 - Command Prompt 9. To copy the file comctl32.ocx into the c:\Windows\System32 directory, type regsvr32 c:\windows\system32\comctl32.ocx into the Command Prompt, where c: is the drive containing the Windows folder. 10. Press Enter and the message box shown in Figure 1-12 on page 1-12 is displayed. Figure 1-12 - comctl32.ocx Succeeded Message Box 11. 1-12 Click OK. Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Installing the Multi Host Application in Windows Vista and Windows 7 12. To copy the file comdlgl32.ocx into the c:\Windows\System32 directory, type regsvr32 c:\windows\system32\comdlgl32.ocx into the Command Prompt (Figure 1-11 on page 1-12), where c: is the drive containing the Windows folder. 13. Press Enter and a message box similar to Figure 1-12 on page 1-12 appears. 14. Click OK. 15. Close the Command Prompt (Figure 1-11 on page 1-12). 16. To start the Multi Host application, right-click the shortcut in the Start menu (see Figure 1-13 on page 1-13). Figure 1-13 - Multi Host Step in Windows Vista Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 1-13 Chapter 1 • Software Installation 17. Select Run as administrator. If the user does not have Administrative rights on the PC, many error messages can appear, as shown in Figure 1-14 on page 1-14. Figure 1-14 - Typical Error Messages Proceed as follows: 1. Obtain Administrative rights on the PC. 2. Install the Multi Host software. 3. Start the Multi Host software. 4. Ensure no error messages are displayed. 1-14 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Additional Information 1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The software installation is now completed. To obtain more information, please consult the following parts of this manual: • Starting the Multi Host software: See Section 2.1 on page 2-1. • Passwords: See Section 2.2 on page 2-2. • Configuring a network of Hydran M2 or Intellix MO150 devices: See Section 2.3 on page 2-3. • Selecting the mode of operation: See Section 2.4 on page 2-12. • Buttons and menus: See Chapter 3. • Inputs required for each model: See Section 4.1 on page 4-1. • Selecting a model: See Section 4.2 on page 4-4. • Commands available for all graphs: See Chapter 5. • Detailed explanations of the models, the required inputs, the models outputs and the associated alarms: See Chapter 6 to Chapter 15. • Troubleshooting: See Chapter 17. • Software License for the Multi Host software: See Appendix A. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 1-15 Chapter 1 • Software Installation PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 1-16 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Chapter 2 Managing Device Connections This Chapter explains how to start the Multi Host software, how to configure a network of Hydran M2 or Intellix MO150 devices, and then how to select the mode of operation. 2.1 STARTING THE MULTI HOST SOFTWARE To start the software, click Start, move the cursor onto All Programs and then onto GE Energy (or the destination folder selected in Figure 1-5 on page 1-6), and then click Multi Host Application. The Splash Screen shown in Figure 2-1 on page 2-1 appears in the middle of the screen while the software is loading. Figure 2-1 - Splash Screen Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 2-1 Chapter 2 • Managing Device Connections 2.2 PASSWORDS Access to many functions of the Multi Host software is protected by passwords. The levels of access are described in Table 2-1 on page 2-2. Table 2-1 - Password Levels and Available Functions Access Level Password 0 None Anyone with access to the device or Multi Host software can: • View readings • View configuration values 1 1253 For configuring system parameters. Typically used by technicians for configuration and maintenance. • Configure inputs • Configure models • Configure alarms • Acknowledge alarms • Configure communication parameters • Configure history log rate • Clear history • Reset historic maximum values • Change station identification number • Plus the level-0 functions 2 1231 For advanced configuration. Typically used by engineers for complete system access. • Configure relay mode • Install new sensor • Plus the level-0 and level-1 functions 3 Restricted Troubleshooting by employees of General Electric Canada Purpose and Functions The Password Screen box shown in Figure 2-2 on page 2-3 is displayed when an on-line connection is established. • To cancel the operation and return to the previous window, click Cancel or the X in the top right corner. In this case, level-0 (read-only) access is granted. 2-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuring the Network • Enter the level-1 (1253) or level-2 (1231) password. • Click OK. Figure 2-2 - Password Screen Box Once a password has been correctly entered, it remains in effect for 30 minutes. During this period, if the Multi Host software is not closed, the password does not need to be entered again when required. After this period, the password is reset to level 0. If there are settings that appear as read-only, this is because a higher-level password is required. To enter it, select Security in the Options menu, enter the password and click OK. 2.3 CONFIGURING THE NETWORK 2.3.1 Hierarchical Network Structure The first time the Multi Host software is started, the Communication Server, the Power Stations and the Devices must be configured. The hierarchical structure of these components is as follows: • Communication Server (Section 2.3.2 on page 2-5): A computer on which the Communication Server software is installed. Every Communication Server could be linked to one or more Power Stations. • Power Station (Section 2.3.3 on page 2-7): A group of Devices connected in a daisy chain. The connections to a Power Station can be either RS-232, Ethernet (via copper wires or fiber optic), or modem. • Device (Section 2.3.4 on page 2-8): Can be a Hydran M2 or an Intellix MO150 . Every Device has an ID number to identify it when it is in a daisy chain. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 2-3 Chapter 2 • Managing Device Connections The System Manager window shown in Figure 2-3 on page 2-4 is used to configure the Devices networks. It opens automatically when the Multi Host software is started, or when Change Work Mode is selected in the Options menu. Figure 2-3 - System Manager Window • • • • The left side displays the Power Stations and Devices in a tree structure. To show the Devices contained in a Power Station, click the + on its left. To hide the Devices contained in a Power Station, click the - on its left. To see (on the right side) the parameters of a Power Station or a Device, select its name on the left side. • To save the modifications brought to parameters, click Save. • To exit this window, click Exit or the X in the top right corner. 2-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuring the Network 2.3.2 Adding a Communication Server The first time the Multi Host software is started, the Communication Server parameters must be entered in the System Manager window shown in Figure 2-4 on page 2-5, which opens automatically. If this is not the first time, then click Add Server in Figure 2-3 on page 2-4. Figure 2-4 - Adding a Communication Server in the System Manager Window Note: Only one Communication Server can be installed on a single PC. • Server Display Name: The name of the Communication Server. • Server Network Name: The network name of the computer on which the Communication Server is being created. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 2-5 Chapter 2 • Managing Device Connections • Computer Icon (to the right of Server Network Name): To display a list of the computers currently found on the network. The Computer Names box shown in Figure 2-5 on page 2-6 appears. Figure 2-5 - Computer Names Box – Close: To cancel the operation. – Click the name of the computer on which the Communication Server is installed. – Click OK. • Save (in Figure 2-4 on page 2-5): To create the Communication Server with the parameters entered. 2-6 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuring the Network 2.3.3 Adding a Power Station In Figure 2-3 on page 2-4, click Add Power Station. The right side of the System Manager window can then be used to configure the Power Station parameters (see Figure 2-6 on page 2-7). Figure 2-6 - Adding a Power Station in the System Manager Window • Power Station Name: The name of the Power Station, which is saved in the Multi Host database only and serves display purposes for easy identification in all windows and boxes. • Power Station ID: Identifier (number, integer-type) associated to a Power Station that together with the Device ID form a pair representing the unique identification of a Device in the RS-485 network of Devices. This identifier must be different for different Power Stations. The factory-set value is 1 but the user should change it using the Device’s display and keypad if the Multi Host software has to connect to more than one Power Stations. A warning message box appears when connecting to a Device if the user has input a Power Station ID value that does not match the value already existing in the Device. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 2-7 Chapter 2 • Managing Device Connections • Protocol: The communication protocol used to communicate with the Devices. Select between: – DNP3 – ModBus Ascii – ModBus RTU – ModBus TCP/IP • Connection Type: The way the Power Station is connected. Select between: – RS-232 (for all protocols) – Hydran Controller (for DNP3, ModBus* ASCII and ModBus RTU only) – TCP/IP (for DNP3 and ModBus TCP/IP only) – MODEM (for DNP3 and ModBus ASCII only) • COM Port: – For RS-232 and TCP/IP connections: The port to which the Device is connected. – For modem connections: The port to which the internal or external modem is connected. • Baud Rate: The speed of the connection: – For RS-232 connections: The same speed must be configured in the Device. – For modem connections: The speed must be 38,400 bps or lower. • TCP/IP Port (for TCP/IP only): The port used by the Device’s Ethernet card. • TCP/IP Address (for TCP/IP only): The IP address of the Device’s Ethernet card. Note: It is also applicable with a fiber optic converter. • Modem String (for modem only): The string sent to the computer’s modem in order to initialize the connection. The default setting is Z3&FX3&M0&D2, which is valid for most modems. • Phone Number: The number (without hyphens) to dial in order to reach the Device. • Save: To create the Power Station with the parameters entered. The newly created Power Station appears in the tree structure on the left side. • Exit: To exit this window. 2.3.4 Adding a Device In Figure 2-3 on page 2-4, select on the left side the Power Station to which you want to add a Device, and click Add Device. The right side of the System Manager window can then be used to configure the Device parameters (see Figure 2-7 on page 2-9). 2-8 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuring the Network Figure 2-7 - Adding a Device in the System Manager Window • Device Name: The desired name for the Device, which is saved in the Multi Host database only and serves display purposes for easy identification in all windows and boxes. • Device Type: Selected between Hydran M2 and Intellix MO150. • Device ID: Identifier (number, integer-type) associated to a Device that together with the Power Station ID form a pair representing the unique identification of a Device in the RS-485 network of Devices. This identifier must be different for each Device inside a Power Station. The factory-set value is 1 but the user should change it using the Device’s display and keypad if the Multi Host software has to connect to more than one Device. A warning message box appears when connecting to a Device if the user has input a Device ID value that does not match the value already existing in the Device. • Power Station: Select from the drop-down list the name of the Power Station to which the Device is being added. • Source DNP3 Address (if the Power Station’s Protocol is DNP3 in Figure 2-6 on page 2-7): The DNP address of the Server. It must be different from the DNP addresses of all the Devices in the Power Station. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 2-9 Chapter 2 • Managing Device Connections • Device DNP3 Address (if the Power Station’s Protocol is DNP3): The address of the Device. The same address must be configured in the Device. • ModBus Slave Address (if the Power Station’s Protocol is ModBus Ascii, ModBus RTU or ModBus TCP/IP in Figure 2-6 on page 2-7): The address of the Device. The same address must be configured in the Device. • Connection Timeout: The maximum period of time (in seconds) during which the Multi Host software will search for the connection, when connecting to a Device. • Request Timeout: The maximum period of time (in seconds) during which the Multi Host software will wait for a response, if the connection to a Device is lost. • Connect On Startup: If enabled [], the Multi Host software attempts to connect to this Device when clicking Online. • Save: To create the Device with the parameters entered. The newly created Device appears in the tree structure on the left side. • Exit: To exit this window. 2.3.5 Deleting a Communication Server, a Power Station or a Device Proceed as follows in Figure 2-3 on page 2-4: • Communication Server: Select the Communication Server in the drop-down list at the top, and click Delete Server. • Power Station: Select the Power Station in the tree structure on the left side, and click Delete Power Station. • Device: Select the Device in the tree structure on the left side, and click Delete Device. A confirmation message box similar to the one shown in Figure 2-8 on page 2-10 is displayed. Figure 2-8 - Remove Communication Server? Confirmation Box • No: To cancel the deletion. • Yes: To delete the Communication Server, the Power Station or the Device. 2-10 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuring the Network 2.3.6 Updating the Communication Server The Communication Server supports true client server architecture, thus enabling many PC’s running the Multi Host software to connect to the PC running the Communication Server software. Two message boxes presented in this Section can appear if all of the following conditions are met: • The Communication Server is accessed by a Multi Host application on a PC. • Changes are made in the System Manager window (Figure 2-3 on page 2-4), such as adding or deleting Power Stations or Devices. • The System Manager window is accessed while connecting to the Communication Server on another PC. If another user deleted a Power Station, the message box shown in Figure 2-9 on page 2-11 is displayed. Figure 2-9 - Power Station Does Not Exist • Click OK; this message pops up in the System Manager window (Figure 2-3 on page 2-4). Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 2-11 Chapter 2 • Managing Device Connections If another user deleted a Device, the message box shown in Figure 2-10 on page 2-12 appears. Figure 2-10 - Device Deleted Box • Click OK; the Multi Host software connects to other Devices available in the list, and the deleted Device appears in grey (off-line) in the System Manager window (Figure 2-3 on page 2-4). Note: The configuration can only be changed when all clients are off-line. If another user than the one who made the above changes connects using the Multi Host software from another PC, it is recommended to proceed as follows in order to see the changes made in the System Manager configuration: 1. Delete the existing Communication Server. 2. Add a new Communication Server. 3. Connect. 2.4 WORKING ON-LINE OR OFF-LINE Once the Power Stations and Devices have been configured, two working modes are available: on-line or off-line. Power Stations can be put on-line or off-line using Change Working Mode as explained in Section 2.4.1 on page 2-13. Individual Devices can be put on-line or off-line by selecting Connect as explained in Section 2.4.2 on page 2-14. For a comparison of on-line versus off-line, see Table 2-2 on page 2-13. 2-12 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Working On-Line or Off-Line Table 2-2 - On-Line Versus Off-Line On-Line Working Mode Off-Line Working Mode Purpose Operators and engineers can access real-time data as it is being collected and can modify the configuration. Local utility managers can access data already imported into the database of the PC running the Multi Host software. Password Required for write operations None required Functions Available All functions including: • Changing configuration • Graphical display of real-time data • Viewing active alarms • Importing data into the PC database Limited to viewing stored data: • Configuration • History • Models • Service data How It Works A direct communication link (serial, modem, LAN) is used between the Device and the PC running the Multi Host software. No direct communication link. The Multi Host software reads data already imported into the Microsoft Access* database on the PC. If the Device was never online, default values are displayed. 2.4.1 Changing Working Mode for Power Stations Switching a Power Station to on-line or off-line is possible without closing the Multi Host application. In the Options menu select Change Working Mode, or click the button shown on the right. The Exit Current Working Mode? confirmation box shown in Figure 2-11 on page 2-14 appears. • No: To cancel the operation. • Yes: To exit the current working mode. The System Manager window (Figure 2-3 on page 2-4) then opens. – Select a Server in the Communication Server drop-down list. – Select a Power Station on the left side. – Click Online. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 2-13 Chapter 2 • Managing Device Connections Figure 2-11 - Exit Current Working Mode? Box 2.4.2 Connecting and Disconnecting Devices To connect or disconnect an individual Device, in the System Network View menu select a Device then right-click on it. The Device Connect/Disconnect box shown in Figure 2-12 on page 2-14 is displayed. Note: Another way to connect or disconnect an individual Device is to select the Device in the System Network View menu, then click the Connect/Disconnect button shown on the right. Figure 2-12 - Device Connect/Disconnect Box If at least one of the Power Station ID’s or Device ID’s does not correspond with the values saved in the Device, when the user tries to connect on-line to the Device, the warning message box shown in Figure 2-13 on page 2-15 appears and the connection to the Device stops. The user must verify the values available in the Device, using its display and keypad, and then enter appropriate values to ensure the pair of Power Station ID and Device ID is unique for each Device. Refer to Section 17.1.3 on page 17-3. 2-14 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Additional Information Figure 2-13 - Power Station ID and Device ID Do Not Correspond Message Box 2.5 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To obtain more information, please consult the following parts of this manual: • • • • • Buttons and menus: See Chapter 3. Inputs required for each model: See Section 4.1 on page 4-1. Selecting a model: See Section 4.2 on page 4-4. Commands available for all graphs: See Chapter 5. Detailed explanations of the models, the required inputs, the models outputs and the associated alarms: See Chapter 6 to Chapter 15. • Troubleshooting: See Chapter 17. • Software License for the Multi Host software: See Appendix A. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 2-15 Chapter 2 • Managing Device Connections PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 2-16 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Chapter 3 Buttons and Menus After starting the Multi Host software, the main window shown in Figure 3-1 on page 3-1 is displayed. Figure 3-1 - Main Window Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-1 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus This Chapter explains the buttons and menus that are common to all windows. The buttons are described in Section 3.1 on page 3-2, and the menus are presented in the following Sections: • • • • • • File menu (Section 3.2 on page 3-3) View menu (Section 3.3 on page 3-4) Configuration menu (Section 3.4 on page 3-34) Options menu (Section 3.5 on page 3-72) Window menu: To select the active window Help menu (Section 3.6 on page 3-75) 3.1 BUTTONS The set of buttons shown in Figure 3-2 on page 3-2 can be commonly used through the various Multi Host software windows. They are described below. Figure 3-2 - Buttons (or Network View in the View menu): To display real-time measurements, model values and input readings from the Devices to which the Multi Host software is connected. See Section 3.3.1 on page 3-6. (or Models in the View menu): To select a model and display graphically real-time or historic model values for a certain period of time. See Section 3.3.3 on page 3-19. (or History in the View menu): To download history logs of measured values, alarms and other events to a PC using the Multi Host software. See Section 3.3.4 on page 3-26. (or Setup in the Configuration menu): To configure the Input/Output modules, alarms, models and history in the Multi Host software. See Section 3.4.2 on page 3-36. (or Test in the Configuration menu): To test the relays and alarms. See Section 3.4.3 on page 3-60. 3-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 File Menu (or Service in the Configuration menu): To set the sensor parameters, to activate models, and to view service data. See Section 3.4.4 on page 3-64. To connect or disconnect an individual Device. (or Security in the Options menu): To change the security level. See Section 2.2 on page 2-2. (or Change Working Mode in the Options menu): To switch from on-line to off-line, or vice versa, for any Power Station. See Section 2.4.1 on page 2-13. (or Print Screen in the File menu): To send the contents of the active window to the Microsoft Windows default printer. (or Exit in the File menu): To close the Multi Host software. See Section 3.2.3 on page 3-4. 3.2 FILE MENU The File menu includes three items: • All History Download (Section 3.2.1 on page 3-3) • Print Screen (Section 3.2.2 on page 3-4) • Exit (Section 3.2.3 on page 3-4) 3.2.1 All History Download This function is used to download all the history records contained in a Device: • • • • • • • Short-term records Long-term records Events Alarms Service records Digital events DGA records Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-3 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus Proceed as follows: 1. Select the desired Device in the Network View window (Figure 3-8 on page 3-8). The All History Download item becomes enabled in the File menu. 2. In the File menu, select All History Download. 3. Select the wanted History Type. 4. Press OK. The All History Download progress box shown in Figure 3-3 on page 3-5 is displayed. • After each type of history has been downloaded, a red checkmark [] appears to the left of its name. • When all history records have been downloaded, the progress box closes automatically. 3.2.2 Print Screen In the File menu select Print Screen, or click the button shown on the right. The content of the active window is sent to the Microsoft Windows default printer. 3.2.3 Exit In the File menu select Exit, or click the button shown on the right. The confirmation box shown in Figure 3-4 on page 3-6 appears. • Yes: To exit the software application. • No: To cancel the operation and return to the previous window. 3.3 VIEW MENU The View menu is used to display information, and includes the following: • • • • • • Network View (Section 3.3.1 on page 3-6) Real Time (Section 3.3.2 on page 3-11) Models (Section 3.3.3 on page 3-19) History (Section 3.3.4 on page 3-26) View & Update Last DGA Test and Service 3-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 View Menu Figure 3-3 - All History Download Progress Box Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-5 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus Figure 3-4 - Exit the Application? Box 3.3.1 Network View The Network View window is used to display real-time measurements, model values and input readings from the Devices connected to the Multi Host software. In the View menu select Network View, or click the button shown on the right. The first time the Multi Host software application is opened, the Network View Parameters Not Configured window shown in Figure 3-5 on page 3-5 is displayed since those parameters are not assigned yet for the selected Power Station. Figure 3-5 - Network View Parameters Not Configured Box • Click OK. • To select which parameters are displayed in the Network View window, proceed as described in Section 3.4.1 on page 3-34. When the parameters have been selected, the Network View window shown in Figure 3-6 on page 3-7 appears. 3-6 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 View Menu Figure 3-6 - Network View Window for a Power Station • The left side of the window illustrates the tree structure of the network. It can be used to rapidly switch between Devices. • The parameters (up to five) on the right side are the ones selected in Section 3.4.1 on page 3-34, with the actual values. • There is a group of up to five parameters and their actual values on the right side for each Device in the Power Station. • To visualize the real-time measurements, model values and input readings for a Device, click its name in the tree structure on the left side. • To close the window, click Close or the X in the top right corner. If you click a Device’s name in the tree structure on the left, the Reading Values progress window shown in Figure 3-7 on page 3-7 appears in the middle of the screen. Figure 3-7 - Reading Values Progress Box After a few seconds, the Network View window is displayed for the selected Device: • Hydran M2: See Figure 3-8 on page 3-8. • Intellix MO150: See Figure 3-9 on page 3-9. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-7 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus Figure 3-8 - Network View Window for a Hydran M2 3-8 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 View Menu Figure 3-9 - Network View Window for an Intellix MO150 • The left side of these windows illustrates the tree structure of the network. It can be used to rapidly switch between Devices. • The Inputs tab is shown first for the selected Device. • To see the Models tab, click it. • For the Hydran M2: To see the Hydran M2 Readings tab, click it. • To visualize the real-time measurements, model values and input readings for another Device, click its name in the tree structure on the left side. • To close the window, click Close or the X in the top right corner. At the start-up of the Multi Host software, when a Power Station is put on-line, the software displays the Network View window for the Power Station with the selected parameters of all the Devices. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-9 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus The tree structure on the left side also quickly shows whether any of the Power Stations or Devices detected any problems and displays active alarms: • A green icon to the left of a Power Station or Device’s name indicates it is on-line with no active alarms. • A red icon indicates it is on-line with an active alarm. • A grey icon indicates it is off-line. • If no alarms are present, the View Active Alarms button is disabled (grey). • If there are active alarms, click View Active Alarms to view them. The Active Alarms box shown in Figure 3-10 on page 3-10 appears. Figure 3-10 - Active Alarms Box – A question mark in a circle at the left end in the Name column indicates the Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommendations advices are available for this active alarm. – Double-click the alarm name or right-click anywhere in the row. The appropriate Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommended Action box appears (see an example in Figure 16-2 on page 16-4). Note: More details on the Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommendations (DPR) module are available in Chapter 16. The entire information for the 88 alarm conditions that can be displayed in the DPR module can be found in Appendix B. – Select the alarm to acknowledge by clicking it. – Click Acknowledge. – Click Close. To enable the other options in the View menu, the Network View window (Figure 3-8 on page 3-8) must be opened for a specific Device. If the options are disabled (grey), open the Network View window first. 3-10 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 View Menu 3.3.2 Real Time The Real Time menu includes three items: • Actual Values (Section 3.3.2.1 on page 3-11) • Maximum Values (Section 3.3.2.2 on page 3-15) • Alarms (Section 3.3.2.3 on page 3-18) 3.3.2.1 Actual Values In the View menu, select Real Time and then Actual Values. The Reading Actual Values progress box shown in Figure 3-11 on page 3-11 appears in the middle of the screen. Figure 3-11 - Reading Actual Values Progress Box 3.3.2.1.1 Inputs Tab A few seconds later, the Inputs tab of the Actual Values window is displayed. Because the Device is fully dynamic, the Multi Host software displays only the inputs, both analog and digital, that are connected to the Device and configured. The Hydran M2 has four analog or digital plug-in inputs (see Figure 3-12 on page 3-12): • The analog plug-in inputs can be configured to display any of the following: – None – User Defined #1 – User Defined #2 – User Defined #3 – User Defined #4 – Top oil temperature – OLTC tank temperature – Tap position – Ambient temperature – Bottom oil temperature – Winding H current – Winding X current – Winding Y current Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-11 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus • The digital plug-in inputs can be configured to display any of the following: – Transformer Energized Status – Cooling Bank 1 – Cooling Bank 2 – Any other user-defined value Figure 3-12 - Inputs Tab of the Actual Values Window for a Hydran M2 The Intellix MO150 has the following inputs (see the right side of Figure 3-9 on page 3-9): • Eight integrated dc analog inputs, which can be configured to display any of the following: – None – User Defined #1 – User Defined #2 – User Defined #3 – User Defined #4 3-12 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 View Menu • • • • – Top oil temperature – OLTC tank temperature – Tap position – Ambient temperature – Bottom oil temperature – Hydran ppm (from the Hydran M2) – %RH Level (from the Hydran M2) – %RH Sensor Temperature (from the Hydran M2) Two integrated digital inputs, which are pre-configured to display the following: – Cooling Bank 1 feedback status – Cooling Bank 2 feedback status Five integrated ac analog inputs, which are pre-configured to display the following: – Winding H current – Winding X current – Winding Y current – Cooling Bank 1 current – Cooling Bank 2 current Four additional analog or digital plug-in inputs, which can be configured to display any of the following: – Transformer Energized Status – Any other user-defined value Optional: up to four Hydran S2’s can be connected to the CanBus port. 3.3.2.1.2 Models Tab To view the values calculated by the models, click the Models tab. A window similar to Figure 3-13 on page 3-14 appears. The models displayed depend on the inputs connected to the Device and will be displayed automatically once the necessary inputs are connected. The models are discussed in further detail in Chapter 6 to Chapter 15. 3.3.2.1.3 Hydran M2 Readings Tab (Only for the Hydran M2) To view the actual values read by the Hydran M2, click the Hydran M2 Readings tab. A window similar to the right side of Figure 3-8 on page 3-8 is displayed. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-13 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus Figure 3-13 - Models Tab of the Actual Values Window The following readings can be measured by the Hydran M2 sensor: • Hydran Readings: – Hydran Level: The level of Hydran gas, in ppm – Hydran Level Hourly Trend: The daily trend of Hydran gas in ppm/x hours, where x is the Hourly Trend Period – Hydran Level Daily Trend: The daily trend of Hydran gas in ppm/x days, where x is the Daily Trend Period • Moisture Readings: – %RH Level: The relative humidity, in % – %RH at Standard Temperature: The relative humidity (in %) at the user-defined standard temperature, used to compare RH% values from different transformers even if the sensors are at different temperatures – %RH Level Hourly Average: The average relative humidity (in %), computed over the %RH Average Period 3-14 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 View Menu – H2O PPM Hourly Average: The average moisture level (in %), computed over the %RH Average Period – %RH Sensor Temperature Hourly Average: The average temperature of the relative humidity sensor, in °C – H2O PPM Level: The water content, in parts per million • Temperature Readings: – Base Plate Temperature: The temperature (in °C) of the base plate that holds the Hydran sensor – Heater Power: The amount of power used by the base plate heater, in % – Actual Temperature Set Point: The computed value of the temperature set point (in °C) based on the modulation temperature settings – Hydran Sensor Temperature: The temperature of the Hydran sensor, in °C 3.3.2.2 Maximum Values In the View menu, select Real Time and then Maximum Values. The Reading Maximum Values progress box shown in Figure 3-14 on page 3-15 appears in the middle of the screen. Figure 3-14 - Reading Maximum Values Progress Box A few seconds later, the Temperature Values tab of the Maximum Values window is displayed for the selected Device: • Hydran M2: See Figure 3-15 on page 3-16. • Intellix MO150: See Figure 3-16 on page 3-17. These windows display the maximum values set for the selected and configured inputs. • • • • • To see the maximum load current values, click the Load Current Values tab. For the Intellix MO150: To view the tap position values, click the Tap Pos Min Max tab. To view the maximum apparent power values, click the Apparent Power Values tab. To reset any of these maximum values, select the value and click Reset Max. To close the window, click Close or the X in the top right corner. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-15 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus Figure 3-15 - Maximum Values Window for a Hydran M2 The following maximum values, along with their date and time, can be displayed: • Temperature Values tab: – Highest Winding Hot-Spot Temperature, in °C – Highest Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Source – OLTC Tank Temperature: The temperature of the tap changer tank, in °C – Top Oil Temperature, in °C – Winding Hot-Spot Temperature for Windings H, X, Y, and C, in °C • Load Current Values tab: – Current Winding H – Current Winding X – Current Winding Y – Historic Max for Highest winding Load, in P.U. – Historic Max for Highest Winding Load Source 3-16 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 View Menu Figure 3-16 - Maximum Values Window for an Intellix MO150 • Tap Pos Min Max tab (for the Intellix MO150): – Maintenance Tap Position Transition Count – Operator Tap Position Transition Count – Permanent Tap Position Transition Count • Apparent Power Values tab: – Historic Max for MVA winding H – Historic Max for MVA winding X – Historic Max for MVA winding Y Note: Some inputs do not have any associated maximum values. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-17 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus 3.3.2.3 Alarms In the View menu, select Real Time and then Alarms. The Alarms window shown in Figure 3-17 on page 3-18 displays a complete list of the enabled alarms along with their acknowledgement status. Figure 3-17 - Alarms Window Note: Some model-related alarms can only be generated if two specific models are enabled. Appendix E presents the list of all alarm messages that can appear on the Multi Host software. Some alarms could be off but not acknowledged; this occurs when an alarm condition is present and then returns to normal. To ensure the presence of this alarm is noticed, the Acknowledgement Status remains as PENDING. 3-18 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 View Menu Note: If at least one Hydran S2 is connected to the Intellix MO150 (via the CanBus port), then the related Hydran S2 alarms are displayed in the Intellix MO150’s Alarms window (Figure 3-17 on page 3-18). The following properties are listed for each alarm: • No.: The number of the alarm. • Name: The name of the alarm. A question mark in a circle at the left end in the Name column indicates the Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommendations advices are available for this active alarm. • Type: The type of the alarm. 1st Level indicates a High or Low alarm, 2nd Level indicates a High-High or Low-Low alarm, and Input Fault indicates an alarm due to a system fault condition. • Set Point: The maximum or minimum acceptable value before the alarm is triggered. These values are configurable (see Section 3.4.2.2 on page 3-46). • Present Value: The value measured currently. • Status: Indicates if the alarm is ON or OFF. • Acknowledge Status: Can be blank (no active alarm), PENDING (an alarm that is or has been active but has not been acknowledged), or ACKNOWLEDGED. • An entire row having a red background indicates the alarm is still active. • For any active alarm, double-click the alarm name or right-click anywhere in the row. The appropriate Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommended Action box appears (see an example in Figure 16-2 on page 16-4). Note: More details on the Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommendations (DPR) module are available in Chapter 16. The entire information for the 88 alarm conditions that can be displayed in the DPR module can be found in Appendix B. • To acknowledge an alarm, select it and click Acknowledge. • To close the window, click Close or the X in the top right corner. 3.3.3 Models In the View menu select Models, or click the button shown on the right. The View Models window shown in Figure 3-18 on page 3-20 appears. The available models are listed on the left. For detailed explanations of the models, the required inputs, the models outputs and the associated alarms, see Chapter 6 to Chapter 15. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-19 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus 3.3.3.1 Real Time Values By default, Real Time Values is selected in the View Models window, shown in Figure 3-18 on page 3-20. Figure 3-18 - View Models Window With Real-Time Values To display a model’s real-time graph that is updated every 15 seconds, proceed as follows: • • • • Ensure Real Time Values is selected. Click the name of the desired real-time model on the left side. If Custom Screen is selected, see Section 3.3.3.1.1 on page 3-21. To close the window without generating a real-time graph, click Cancel. Note: The commands available for all graphs are described in Chapter 5. If a Hydran S2 is connected to an Intellix MO150 (via the CanBus port) and configured to monitor Tank #1 gas, and if no Hydran M2 is connected to the Intellix MO150’s 4–20 mA analog inputs, then all models where Hydran-related inputs are required will be calculated 3-20 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 View Menu using those Hydran S2 measured values. Otherwise, if a Hydran S2 is connected to Tank #2 gas or Tank #3 gas or to Auxiliary 1 to Auxiliary 3, then all models requiring Hydran values will not be calculated. 3.3.3.1.1 Custom Screen The curves of up to ten analog inputs, digital inputs and/or calculated values from different models can be graphed simultaneously. In Figure 3-18 on page 3-20, click Custom Screen, and the Select Inputs box shown in Figure 3-19 on page 3-21 appears. Figure 3-19 - Select Inputs Box Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-21 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus • The inputs enumerated in the Connected analog inputs and Connected digital inputs areas depend on the inputs connected to the Device. • The values listed in the Calculated values area depend on the models enabled. • Select [] up to ten analog inputs, digital inputs and/or calculated values by clicking their name or the check box to the left of each name. • If you try to add an eleventh curve, the message box shown in Figure 3-20 on page 3-22 appears. Click OK and remove [ ] at least one curve. Figure 3-20 - Maximum Ten Items Allowed Box • In Figure 3-19 on page 3-21, to save the selections for future use, click Save and enter a name in the text box that appears. • To reuse a custom configuration, select it in the Select custom configuration drop-down list. • To delete a custom configuration, select it in the list and then click Delete. • To clear the selected curves, click Clear. • To close the box without generating a Custom Screen graph, click Cancel or the X in the top right corner. • To produce the desired Custom Screen graph, click OK. A typical Custom Screen graph is shown in Figure 3-21 on page 3-23. Initially, there are no curves, and real-time data appears as time passes. Note: The commands available for all graphs are described in Chapter 5. 3-22 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 View Menu Figure 3-21 - Typical Custom Screen Graph 3.3.3.2 Historic Values When the Historic Values mode is selected, the displayed readings and models are different from the ones available in real time. This feature is used to see all related historic records, even if the selected inputs are no longer connected. In the View Models window (Figure 3-18 on page 3-20), click Historic Values, and this window becomes as shown in Figure 3-22 on page 3-24. Note: Before trying to graph historic values, it is recommended to download all the history of the Device to have it available. To do so, refer to Section 3.3.4 on page 3-26. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-23 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus Figure 3-22 - View Models Window With Historic Values The Time Stamp and the Start Date are now enabled. Also, all the models now appear on the left side, to allow graphing historic values if they exist. • Ensure Historic Values is selected. • To display the historic values since a certain day, click Day and select the Start Date. This will graph the selected model’s values from that day to the last available entry. • To display the historic values since the beginning of a certain month, click Month and select the Start Date. This will graph the selected model’s values from the beginning of that month to the last available entry. • To display the historic values during a certain period, click Range and select the Start Date and then the End Date. This will graph the selected model’s values between the two dates. • Click the name of the desired model on the left side. • Depending on the date range selected, some history records could have to be downloaded. The confirmation box shown in Figure 3-23 on page 3-25 would appear. Click Yes. 3-24 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 View Menu Figure 3-23 - Download History? Confirmation Box • During the download operation, a progress box similar to Figure 3-24 on page 3-25 is displayed and then disappears automatically. Figure 3-24 - History Download Progress Box • If Custom Screen is selected, see Section 3.3.3.1.1 on page 3-21. • To close Figure 3-22 on page 3-24 without generating a real-time graph, click Cancel. Note: The commands available for all graphs are described in Chapter 5. If no history is available for the desired period of time, the History not available message box shown in Figure 3-25 on page 3-26 appears. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-25 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus Figure 3-25 - History Not Available Box • Click OK. • Modify the Time Stamp, the Start Date and/or the End Date in Figure 3-22 on page 3-24. 3.3.4 History The Device keeps history logs of measured values, alarms and other events. These logs can be downloaded to a PC using the Multi Host software. Once downloaded, the history can be viewed in a grid or as a graph, or exported to a Microsoft Excel* file to be compatible with other office tools. In the View Menu, select History. The History Options box shown in Figure 3-26 on page 3-26 is displayed. Figure 3-26 - History Options Box 3-26 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 View Menu The following types of history can be selected in the History drop-down list: • Short Term: Device measurements, recorded periodically at a specified interval. This interval can be set from 1 to 360 minute(s), thus spanning a period of 5 days to 5 years. The total capacity is 2,500 records; for example: – A logging rate of 1 minute provides a capacity of 5 days. – A logging rate of 15 minutes (default value) provides a capacity of 75 days. – A logging rate of 30 minutes provides a capacity of 150 days. – A logging rate of 60 minutes provides a capacity of 300 days. – A logging rate of 360 minutes (6 hours) provides a capacity of 1,800 days (5 years). • Long Term: Device measurements, recorded from one to four times a day. Long Term #1 cannot be turned off, but the others can. The total capacity is 1,250 records; for example: – 1 recording per day provides a capacity of 1,260 days (3.5 years). – 2 recordings per day provide a capacity of 630 days (1.75 years). – 3 recordings per day provide a capacity of 420 days (1.2 years). – 4 recordings per day provide a capacity of 315 days (10.5 months). • Event: Keeps track of changes made to settings such as alarm set points and user-defined models. It also records down the date and time when the Device was powered up and powered down. • Alarms: Keeps track of all alarms that were triggered and acknowledged, as well as all the measured values at the time that the alarm occurred. • Service: Stores the results of sensor tests. • Digital Event: Keeps track of the status of alarm relays and other digital inputs, such as cooling bank status and user-defined inputs. Note: Once changed, the new value takes effect after the completion of the current period. 3.3.4.1 Viewing History in Grid Format Each type of history log can be viewed in a grid. Proceed as follows: • • • • • • In the View menu, select History. In Figure 3-26 on page 3-26, select the desired type in the History drop-down list. In the Type drop-down list, select Grid. Select the Start Date and the End Date for the data to be downloaded. To close the box without generating a grid, click Close or the X in the top right corner. To generate a grid, click OK. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-27 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus If the desired type of history is unavailable during the selected period of time, the Proceeding to Download Missing Records message box shown in Figure 3-27 on page 3-28 appears. Figure 3-27 - Proceeding to Download Missing Records Box • Click OK. • Wait for the history data to transfer from the Device to the PC. Note: The history download time is not proportional to the date range selected, but rather to how much time has passed since the last history download. When OK is clicked, all records of the selected type of history not currently in the PC’s database are downloaded to ensure the PC is completely up to date. Once the history has finished downloading, it is displayed in a grid. There are two types of grid: • The Short Term History and the Long Term History are displayed in a spreadsheet-type format (see Figure 3-28 on page 3-29). 3-28 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 View Menu Figure 3-28 - Short Term or Long Term History Grid • For all the other types of history, there are two separate grids (see Figure 3-29 on page 3-30): – The grid on the left contains the Date and Time as well as the Event Description. – Click an event in the grid on the left. – The grid on the right presents the Value of each Variable at the time of the event occurrence. To close the grid, click Close. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-29 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus Figure 3-29 - Other History Types 3.3.4.2 Viewing Short or Long Term History in Graphical Format Only the Short Term, Long Term, Service and DGA History can be viewed in a graph. Proceed as follows: • In the View Menu, select History. • In Figure 3-26 on page 3-26, select Short Term or Long Term in the History dropdown list. • In the Type drop-down list, select Graphical, and this box becomes as shown in Figure 3-30 on page 3-31. • Select the Start Date and the End Date for the data to be downloaded. • Select [] up to ten parameters by clicking their name or the check box to the left of each name. • If you try to add an eleventh parameter, the message shown in Figure 3-20 on page 3-22 appears. Click OK and remove [ ] at least one parameter. 3-30 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 View Menu Figure 3-30 - History Options Box in Graphical Format • To close the box without generating a graph, click Close or the X in the top right corner. • To generate a graph, click OK. If the desired type of history is unavailable during the selected period of time, the Proceeding to Download Missing Records message box shown in Figure 3-27 on page 3-28 appears. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-31 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus • Click OK. • Wait for the history data to transfer from the Device to the PC. Note: The history download time is not proportional to the date range selected, but rather to how much time has passed since the last history download. When OK is clicked, all records of the selected type of history not currently in the PC’s database are downloaded to ensure the PC is completely up to date. Once the history has finished downloading, it is displayed in a graph similar to Figure 3-21 on page 3-23. Note: The commands available for all graphs are described in Chapter 5. 3.3.4.3 Exporting History The history logs can also be exported to a Microsoft Excel file to be compatible with other office tools. Proceed as follows: • In the View Menu, select History. • In the History Options box shown in Figure 3-26 on page 3-26, select the required History from the drop-down list, for example, Short Term. • In the Type drop-down list, select Export, and this box becomes as shown in Figure 3-31 on page 3-33. • Select the Start Date and the End Date for the data to be downloaded. • Select [] the desired parameters by clicking their name or the check box to the left of each name, or click Select All if all are needed. • To close the box without generating a file, click Close or the X in the top right corner. • To generate a file, click OK. If the desired type of history is unavailable during the selected period of time, the Proceeding to Download Missing Records message box shown in Figure 3-27 on page 3-28 appears. • Click OK. • Wait for the history data to transfer from the Device to the PC. Note: The history download time is not proportional to the date range selected, but rather to how much time has passed since the last history download. When OK is clicked, all 3-32 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 View Menu records of the selected type of history not currently in the PC’s database are downloaded to ensure the PC is completely up to date. Figure 3-31 - History Options Box in Export Format Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-33 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus Once the history has finished downloading, an Exported History message box (see Figure 3-32 on page 3-34) is displayed to show the path and name of the file created. The files are saved in the Export subdirectory found in the Multi Host installation directory; the default directory is C:\Program Files\GE Energy\MultiHost\Export, which might have been modified in Figure 1-5 on page 1-6. Figure 3-32 - Exported History Message Box 3.4 CONFIGURATION MENU The Configuration menu is used to configure the different parameters, alarms, inputs, outputs and all other characteristics of the Device. The Configuration menu includes five items: • • • • • Network View Parameter Selection (Section 3.4.1 on page 3-34) Setup (Section 3.4.2 on page 3-36) Test (Section 3.4.3 on page 3-60) Service (Section 3.4.4 on page 3-64) Display Settings (Section 3.4.5 on page 3-71) 3.4.1 Network View Parameter Selection This function is used to select the parameters you wish to display in the Network View window (Figure 3-6 on page 3-7). Proceed as follows: • In the Network View window, select the desired Power Station. • In the Configuration menu, select Network View Parameter Selection. The Loading Network View Parameter Selection Values progress box shown in Figure 3-33 on page 3-34 appears in the middle of the screen. Figure 3-33 - Loading Network View Parameter Selection Values Progress Box 3-34 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuration Menu After a few seconds, the Network View Parameter Selection window shown in Figure 3-34 on page 3-35 is displayed. It is used to select up to five parameters that will be visible in the Network View window. Figure 3-34 - Network View Parameter Selection Window • In the tree view in the left area, select the Device for which the real-time measurements, model values and input readings will be displayed. • The center area lists all the parameters available for the selected Device. • The right area shows all the parameters already assigned for the selected Device. • To cancel the operation, click Cancel. • To add a parameter to the Device’s Network View, highlight its name in the center area and click >. The selected parameter moves to the right area. • To remove a parameter from the Device’s Network View, highlight its name in the right area and click <. The selected parameter goes into the center area. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-35 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus • If you add a sixth parameter to the right area, the message box shown in Figure 3-35 on page 3-36 appears. Click OK and remove at least one parameter from the right area. Figure 3-35 - Maximum Five Items Allowed Box • When up to five parameters have been selected in Figure 3-34 on page 3-35, click Apply and then OK. 3.4.2 Setup This function is used for configuring inputs, outputs, alarms, models and history in the Multi Host software. In the Configuration menu select Setup, or click the button shown on the right. The Loading Device Data progress box shown in Figure 3-36 on page 3-36 is displayed in the middle of the screen. Figure 3-36 - Loading Device Data Progress Box A few seconds later, the Setup window shown in Figure 3-37 on page 3-37 appears. It gives access to the following options: • • • • • • Input-Output Setup (Section 3.4.2.1 on page 3-38) Alarm Setup (Section 3.4.2.2 on page 3-46) Models (Section 3.4.2.3 on page 3-53) History (Section 3.4.2.4 on page 3-55) Date and Time (Section 3.4.2.5 on page 3-58) Idle Menu (Section 3.4.2.6 on page 3-58) 3-36 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuration Menu Figure 3-37 - Setup Window In the Setup window: • • • • • • The left side displays the Setup tree structure. To expand a node, click the + on its left. To collapse a node, click the - on its left. To see (on the right side) the parameters of an item, select its name on the left side. To apply the modifications brought to parameters, click Apply. To exit this window without applying the modifications, click Cancel. If a value is changed and if Apply or OK is not clicked before moving to another item, the Save Values? box shown in Figure 3-38 on page 3-38 appears to remind that the changes have not been saved. Click Yes to save the changes or No to refuse them. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-37 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus Figure 3-38 - Save Values? Box 3.4.2.1 Input-Output Setup This function is used to configure the I/O card and any plug-in cards in use. The expanded Input-Output Setup tree displays data according to the input configuration for the selected Device: • Hydran M2: See Figure 3-39 on page 3-39. • Intellix MO150 without Hydran S2’s: See Figure 3-40 on page 3-40. • Intellix MO150 with Hydran S2(’s): See Figure 3-41 on page 3-41. 3-38 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuration Menu Figure 3-39 - Expanded Input-Output Setup Tree for a Hydran M2 Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-39 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus Figure 3-40 - Expanded Input-Output Setup Tree for an Intellix MO150 Without Hydran S2’s 3-40 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuration Menu Figure 3-41 - Expanded Input-Output Setup Tree for an Intellix MO150 With Hydran S2(’s) Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-41 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus To configure an input, proceed as follows: • In the list displayed under Input-Output Setup in the above trees, click the + on the left of the selected input to expand it. • Click the input name to configure it. • A configuration box appears. The different types of configuration boxes are explained in the following Sections: – Analog inputs in Section 3.4.2.1.1 on page 3-42. – Digital inputs in Section 3.4.2.1.2 on page 3-44. – Current inputs in Section 3.4.2.1.3 on page 3-45. • Once you have selected the desired settings, click Apply. 3.4.2.1.1 Analog Inputs The analog inputs from the I/O card can be configured for two types of devices (only for the Intellix MO150): • A 4–20 mA analog input (or custom-calibrated) • A Resistive Thermal Device (RTD) input Note: For the Hydran M2, a similar configuration is available if plug-in cards are installed. Up to four plug-in cards can be installed, covering both analog and digital inputs. Note: The main reason to configure analog inputs is to enable models calculation in the Hydran M2 and the Intellix MO150 (see Chapter 6 to Chapter 15). For the Intellix MO150, models are also enabled if plug-in #1 to plug-in #4 are configured. An example of configuration box for an analog input from the I/O card is shown in Figure 3-42 on page 3-43. The analog inputs from the plug-in cards must be set to 4–20 mA or custom-calibrated, and not to RTD (only for the Intellix MO150). • State: The actual reading of the input card. -25 % means no input current is detected. • Output Model: Set this to correspond to the input card. Select between: – None – User defined #1 – User defined #2 – User defined #3 3-42 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuration Menu – User defined #4 – Current Winding X – Current Winding Y – Current Winding H – Top Oil Temp – OLTC Tank Temp – Tap position – Ambient Temp – Bottom Oil Temp – Hydran PPM – %RH Level – %RH Sensor Temperature • Type: Set to Analog Input or RTD Input • Range: – Set to 4-20 mA if the input to the card is to be between 4 and 20 mA. – Set to As Calibrated if the input to the card is calibrated for different currents. Figure 3-42 - Configuration Box for an Analog Input From the I/O Card The properties to be changed differ depending on the parameter assigned to the input. If Output Model is set to User defined, the configuration box looks like in Figure 3-43 on page 3-44. • • • • Enter the Minimum Value. Enter the Maximum Value. Enter the Input Resolution. To modify the input name, input units or reading precision, refer to Section 3.4.2.3 on page 3-53. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-43 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus Figure 3-43 - Configuration Box for an Analog User-Defined Input When the input is set up as desired, click Apply. 3.4.2.1.2 Digital Inputs The Intellix MO150’s digital inputs from the I/O card are set by default to Cooling Bank status, as shown in Figure 3-44 on page 3-44. Figure 3-44 - Configuration Box for a Digital Input From the I/O Card The digital inputs from the plug-in cards can be configured, as shown in Figure 3-45 on page 3-45. • Set each Output Model to None, Trans. Energized or User Defined. • Click Apply to save the settings. 3-44 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuration Menu Figure 3-45 - Configuration Box for the Digital Inputs From the Plug-in Cards For any digital input, you can set the mode to normally open (NO) or normally closed (NC): 1. In the list displayed under Input-Output Setup in Figure 3-39 on page 3-39, click the + on the left of the selected input to expand it. 2. Click the input name to configure it. 3. Set the input mode to either NO or NC. 4. Click Apply to save the settings. 5. If an Output Model is set to User Defined, the following parameters can be modified, as described in Section 3.4.2.3.2 on page 3-54: • • • • 6. Input Name Input Short Name Message Normal State Message Non-Normal State Click Apply to save the settings. 3.4.2.1.3 Current Inputs (Only for the Intellix MO150) The five current inputs from the I/O card are assigned as follows: • Load Current H • Load Current X Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-45 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus • Load Current Y • Cooling Bank 1 • Cooling Bank 2 An example of configuration window for a current input is shown in Figure 3-46 on page 3-46. Figure 3-46 - Configuration Box for a Current Input • • • • The first line shows the reading for the selected current. Configure the CT Primary Ratio. Configure the CT Secondary Ratio. Click Apply to save the settings. 3.4.2.2 Alarm Setup An alarm turns on when a value being monitored goes above (or below) the set point for a period longer than the assigned delay period. If a relay is assigned to an alarm, when the alarm turns on it triggers the relay and turns on one of the LED indicators on the Device. System fault trigger alarms indicate problems with the Device itself. Any alarms selected as system fault triggers will trigger the System OK relay, and will turn off the green System OK LED on the Intellix MO150. For more information on alarm configurations, refer to Section C.2 on page C-12; for information on selecting the system fault trigger alarms, refer to Section 3.4.2.2.2 on page 3-51; for information on setting up the battery alarm, refer to Section 3.4.2.2.1 on page 3-50. Most alarms relate to configured inputs and computed values from the models. These alarms can be assigned to the relays #1 and #2. When triggered, the relays turn on the 3-46 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuration Menu yellow High Alarm LED or the red High-High Alarm LED on the Intellix MO150. For more information on these alarms, see Chapter 6 to Chapter 15; for information on alarms for user-defined analog inputs, see Section 3.4.2.2.3 on page 3-52. Appendix E presents the list of all alarm messages that can appear on the Multi Host software. The following pages present the expanded Alarm Setup tree for the selected Device: • Hydran M2: See Figure 3-47 on page 3-47. • Intellix MO150 without Hydran S2’s: See Figure 3-48 on page 3-48. • Intellix MO150 with Hydran S2(’s): See Figure 3-49 on page 3-49. Figure 3-47 - Expanded Alarm Setup Tree for a Hydran M2 Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-47 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus Figure 3-48 - Expanded Alarm Setup Tree for an Intellix MO150 Without Hydran S2’s 3-48 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuration Menu In case a Hydran S2 is configured to monitor Auxiliary equipment #1 gas to Auxiliary equipment #3 gas, another branch named Auxiliary is displayed in the expanded Alarm Setup tree, as shown in Figure 3-49 on page 3-49. Figure 3-49 - Expanded Alarm Setup Tree for an Intellix MO150 With Hydran S2(’s) Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-49 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus 3.4.2.2.1 Battery Alarm The Battery alarm monitors the internal battery in the Device. The battery keeps the data in memory when the Device is turned off. When the Battery alarm is enabled, it goes on when the voltage is below the set point for a period longer than the specified delay time. To enable the Battery alarm, proceed as follows: 1. In the expanded Alarm Setup tree (Figure 3-47 on page 3-47), click Battery. The configuration box shown in Figure 3-50 on page 3-50 appears on the right side. Figure 3-50 - Configuration Box for the Battery Alarm 2. Set the Alarm Delay in hours. 3. For each alarm required, click [] Enable to activate the set point. 4. Enter the Set Point for each enabled alarm. 5. If required, assign a relay to the enabled alarms. Note: Each relay can accept multiple alarms. 6. 3-50 Click Apply to save the settings. Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuration Menu 3.4.2.2.2 System Fault Triggers The system fault triggers show potential problems with the Device itself. Alarms set as system fault triggers can trigger the System OK relay, which turns off the green System OK LED on the Intellix MO150. Note: The Hydran M2 is not equipped with a System OK LED. To enable the system fault trigger alarms, proceed as follows: 1. In the expanded Alarm Setup tree (Figure 3-47 on page 3-47), click System Fault Triggers. The configuration box shown in Figure 3-51 on page 3-51 appears on the right side. All the alarms that can turn on the System OK relay are listed. Figure 3-51 - Configuration Box for the System Fault Triggers 2. For each alarm required to act as a system fault trigger, click [] Enable. 3. Click Apply to save the settings. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-51 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus 3.4.2.2.3 Alarms for User-Defined Analog Inputs User-defined analog inputs can also have associated alarms. To enable an alarm for a userdefined analog input, proceed as follows: 1. In the expanded Alarm Setup tree (Figure 3-47 on page 3-47), click the required user-defined analog input. The configuration box shown in Figure 3-52 on page 3-52 is displayed on the right side. Figure 3-52 - Configuration Box for Alarms for User-Defined Analog Inputs 2. Set the Alarm Delay in minutes. 3. Set the Alarm Deadband. 4. For each alarm required, click [] Enable. 3-52 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuration Menu 5. Enter the Set Point for each enabled alarm. 6. If required, assign a relay to the enabled alarms. 7. Click Apply to save the settings. 3.4.2.3 Models A model is automatically enabled when its required inputs are configured. Many models can be enabled simultaneously. User-defined inputs and plug-ins can also be used by the models. For details on the standard models available in the Hydran M2 and the Intellix MO150, refer to Chapter 6 to Chapter 15. 3.4.2.3.1 Configuring a User-Defined Analog Reading for Use in a Model To configure a user-defined analog reading, proceed as follows: 1. You must already have an input configured as user-defined analog. 2. In the Setup tree structure (Figure 3-37 on page 3-37), click the + to the left of Models. 3. Click the required Analog User Defined #X. The configuration box shown in Figure 3-53 on page 3-53 appears on the right side. Figure 3-53 - Configuration Box for Using a User-Defined Analog Reading in a Model Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-53 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus 4. Enter the desired settings: • Input Name • Input Short Name • Input Units 5. Select the Reading Precision in the drop-down list. 6. Click Apply to save the settings. 3.4.2.3.2 Configuring a User-Defined Digital Reading for Use in a Model To configure a user-defined digital reading, proceed as follows: 1. You must already have an input configured as user-defined digital. 2. In the Setup tree structure (Figure 3-37 on page 3-37), click the + to the left of Models. 3. Click the required Digital User Defined #X. The configuration box shown in Figure 3-54 on page 3-54 is displayed on the right side. Figure 3-54 - Configuration Box for Using a User-Defined Digital Reading in a Model 4. Enter the desired settings: • Input Name • Input Short Name • Message Normal State 3-54 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuration Menu • Message Non-Normal State 5. Click Apply to save the settings. 3.4.2.4 History The Device acquires data regularly and stores it in its memory. This data is called history and can be downloaded to a PC or simply deleted. The log rate can also be modified. Different types of history are explained in more detail in Section 3.3.4 on page 3-26. 3.4.2.4.1 Clear History This function clears the history stored in the embedded software of the Device itself. You have the option to first download the history to your PC before clearing it from the Device. 1. In the Setup tree structure (Figure 3-37 on page 3-37), click the + to the left of History. 2. Click Clear History. The configuration box shown in Figure 3-55 on page 3-55 appears on the right side. Figure 3-55 - Configuration Box for Clear History Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-55 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus 3. • • • • • For each type of history that you want to clear, click [] Clear. You can clear any of the five types of history: Alarms Digital Event Event Short Term Long Term 4. Click Apply to clear each history type that you selected. 5. A message box similar to the one shown in Figure 3-56 on page 3-56 asks whether you want to first download the appropriate history to your PC before clearing it. Click Yes or No. Figure 3-56 - Typical Download History Before Clearing? Box 6. When the requested clearing is complete, the History Cleared message box shown in Figure 3-57 on page 3-56 is displayed. Click OK. Figure 3-57 - History Cleared Box 3-56 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuration Menu 3.4.2.4.2 History Log Rate This function is used to set the recording frequency of short-term and long-term history data. Short-term history is acquired at intervals specified in minutes, while long-term history is acquired once per day at specified time(s). To change the history log rate, proceed as follows: 1. In the Setup tree structure (Figure 3-37 on page 3-37), click the + to the left of History. 2. Click History Log Rate. The configuration box shown in Figure 3-58 on page 3-57 appears on the right side. Figure 3-58 - Configuration Box for History Log Rate 3. Set the Short Term Rate in minutes. 4. Set the time of the day for the Long Term #1 data acquisition. Data will be acquired every day at this time. 5. To set additional times for acquiring long-term data, click [] the appropriate Enable. 6. Set the time of the day for each additional long-term acquisition that is enabled. 7. Click Apply to save the settings. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-57 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus 3.4.2.5 Date and Time To set the date and time of the Device, proceed as follows: 1. In the Setup tree structure (Figure 3-37 on page 3-37), click Date and Time. The configuration box shown in Figure 3-59 on page 3-58 is displayed on the right side. Figure 3-59 - Configuration Box for Date and Time 2. Set the System Date by typing it directly or using the arrow. 3. Set the System Time by typing it directly or using the arrows. 4. Click Apply to save the settings. 3.4.2.6 Idle Menu This function is used to specify which panels appear on the Device’s display when it is idle. If more than one panel is chosen, they alternate every ten seconds. If none is selected, the Device displays its Main Menu, if no alarms are activated. Display of active alarms takes priority over both the Main Menu and any selected panels. To change the idle menu on the Device, proceed as follows: 1. In the Setup tree structure (Figure 3-37 on page 3-37), click Idle Menu. 2. A configuration box appears on the right side for the selected Device: • The idle menu for a Hydran M2 (Figure 3-60 on page 3-59) can include two panels: – Hydran – Apparent Power H 3-58 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuration Menu Figure 3-60 - Configuration Box for the Idle Menu for a Hydran M2 • The idle menu for an Intellix MO150 (Figure 3-61 on page 3-59) can include 12 panels: – Hydran – Moisture/Bubbling – Top Oil Figure 3-61 - Configuration Box for the Idle Menu for an Intellix MO150 Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-59 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus – – – – – – – – – WHST H WHST X/C WHST Y Cooling Tap Position Apparent Power H Apparent Power X Apparent Power Y Aging 3. To display a panel, click [] the appropriate Enable. 4. Click Apply to save the settings. 3.4.3 Test This function is used to verify the alarms and relays. In the Configuration menu select Test, or click the button shown on the right. A Test window is displayed for the selected Device: • Hydran M2: See Figure 3-62 on page 3-61. • Intellix MO150: See Figure 3-63 on page 3-62. In each of the Test windows: • • • • • • The left side displays the Test tree structure. To expand a node, click the + on its left. To collapse a node, click the - on its left. To see (on the right side) the parameters of an item, select its name on the left side. To apply the modifications brought to parameters, click Apply. To exit this window without applying the modifications, click Cancel. Note: To modify any parameters in a Test window, a Level-2 password is required. Refer to Section 2.2 on page 2-2 for information on passwords. 3-60 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuration Menu Figure 3-62 - Test Window for a Hydran M2 Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-61 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus Figure 3-63 - Test Window for an Intellix MO150 3.4.3.1 Relay Test This function is used to test the functionality of the relays. There are five relays: • One reserved for system operation • Two that can be assigned to alarms • Two for activating the cooling banks To test the relays, proceed as follows: 1. 3-62 In the Test tree structure (Figure 3-62 on page 3-61), click Relay. A configuration box appears on the right side for the Intellix MO150 (see Figure 3-64 on page 3-63). Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuration Menu Figure 3-64 - Configuration Box for the Relay Test for an Intellix MO150 2. To test each relay listed, proceed as follows: • Select Force On in the drop-down list, and check that the relay turns on. • Select Force Off, and check that the relay turns off. • Reset to Normal for normal operation. 3. Click Apply to save the settings. 3.4.3.2 Alarm Level-1 Indicator Mode (Only for the Intellix MO150) This is a visual indicator that lights up when a first-level alarm is triggered. To test the indicator light, proceed as follows: 1. Ensure no alarms are triggered. 2. In the Test tree structure (Figure 3-62 on page 3-61), click Alarm Level1 Indicator Mode. The configuration box shown in Figure 3-65 on page 3-64 is displayed on the right side. 3. In the drop-down list, select Force ON. Check that the indicator light turns on. 4. Select Force OFF. Check that the indicator light turns off. 5. Reset to Normal for normal operation. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-63 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus Figure 3-65 - Configuration Box for the Alarm Level-1 Test 3.4.3.3 Alarm Level-2 Indicator Mode (Only for the Intellix MO150) This is a visual indicator that lights up when a second-level alarm or a system fault alarm is triggered. To test the indicator light, proceed as follows: 1. Ensure no alarms are triggered. 2. In the Test tree structure (Figure 3-62 on page 3-61), click Alarm Level2/SysFault Indicator Mode. The configuration box shown in Figure 3-66 on page 3-64 appears on the right side. Figure 3-66 - Configuration Box for the Alarm Level-2 Test 3. In the drop-down list, select Force ON. Check that the indicator lights up. 4. Select Force OFF. Check that the indicator turns off. 5. Reset to Normal for normal operation. 3.4.4 Service This function is used to view service data, change cooling banks and set the enclosure heater. 3-64 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuration Menu In the Configuration menu select Service, or click the button shown on the right. A Service window is displayed for the selected Device: • Hydran M2: See Figure 3-67 on page 3-65. • Intellix MO150: See Figure 3-68 on page 3-66. Figure 3-67 - Service Window for a Hydran M2 • • • • • • The left side displays the Service tree structure. To expand a node, click the + on its left. To collapse a node, click the - on its left. To see (on the right side) the parameters of an item, select its name on the left side. To apply the modifications brought to parameters, click Apply. To exit this window without applying the modifications, click Cancel. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-65 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus Figure 3-68 - Service Window for an Intellix MO150 3.4.4.1 View Service Data This function is used to view information about the Device, such as the battery voltage, serial numbers, sensor information, and casing temperature. 3.4.4.1.1 Battery (Only for the Intellix MO150) In the Service tree structure (Figure 3-68 on page 3-66), click View Service Data then Battery. The configuration box shown in Figure 3-69 on page 3-67 appears on the right side. 3-66 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuration Menu Figure 3-69 - Configuration Box for the Battery 3.4.4.1.2 System Information This function displays the serial numbers of the controller board and of any plug-in cards used. In the Service tree structure (Figure 3-67 on page 3-65), click View Service Data then System Information. The system information is displayed for the selected Device: • Hydran M2: See Figure 3-67 on page 3-65. • Intellix MO150: See Figure 3-68 on page 3-66. The following information is displayed: • Software version and serial number of the controller • Type and serial number of the four plug-in sites • Type and serial number of the two communication plug-in sites 3.4.4.1.3 Sensor Information In the Service tree structure (Figure 3-67 on page 3-65), click View Service Data then Sensor Information. The configuration box shown in Figure 3-70 on page 3-68 appears on the right side. The following information is displayed for the Device’s sensor card: • • • • Type Serial number Status Software version Note: In the Intellix MO150, “Sensor Card” means the I/O card and applies to the whole information shown in the correspondent option for this type of Device. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-67 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus Figure 3-70 - Configuration Box for the Sensor Information 3.4.4.1.4 Configuration Version Tracking This function records the number of configuration changes made to the Device. Every time a setting is modified, the number increases by 0.001. When the firmware is upgraded, you can increase the count by 1, and subsequent configuration changes will continue to be counted by 0.001. To view or reset the number of configuration changes, proceed as follows: 1. In the Service tree structure (Figure 3-67 on page 3-65), click View Service Data then Configuration Version Tracking. The configuration box shown in Figure 3-71 on page 3-68 is displayed on the right side. Figure 3-71 - Configuration Box for the Configuration Version Tracking 2. To reset the count, type 0. 3. If required, input an integer to the left of the decimal. For example, 2 is interpreted as 2.000. Note: The decimal value increases every time the system configuration is modified. 3-68 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuration Menu 4. Click Apply to save the settings. 3.4.4.1.5 Casing Temperature (Only for the Intellix MO150) This function is used to see the temperature of the Intellix MO150’s casing. In the Service tree structure (Figure 3-68 on page 3-66), click View Service Data then Casing Temperature. The configuration box shown in Figure 3-72 on page 3-69 appears on the right side. Figure 3-72 - Configuration Box for the Casing Temperature 3.4.4.1.6 Casing Heater (Only for the Intellix MO150) This function is used to see whether the Intellix MO150’s enclosure heater is on or off. Note: To set the temperature of the enclosure heater, see Section 3.4.4.3 on page 3-70. In the Service tree structure (Figure 3-68 on page 3-66), click View Service Data then Casing Heater. The configuration box shown in Figure 3-73 on page 3-69 is displayed on the right side. Figure 3-73 - Configuration Box for the Casing Heater Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-69 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus 3.4.4.2 Change Cooling Banks (Only for the Intellix MO150) This function is used to set the total activity time for each cooling bank, when the Intellix MO150 is installed on a used transformer whose fans have worked before. In the Service tree structure (Figure 3-68 on page 3-66), click View Service Data then Change Cooling Banks. The configuration box shown in Figure 3-74 on page 3-70 appears on the right side. Figure 3-74 - Configuration Box for Change Cooling Banks 3.4.4.3 Enclosure Heater (Only for the Intellix MO150) This function is used to set the temperature at which to keep the Intellix MO150’s enclosure. In the Service tree structure (Figure 3-68 on page 3-66), click View Service Data then Enclosure Heater. The configuration box shown in Figure 3-75 on page 3-70 is displayed on the right side. Figure 3-75 - Configuration Box for the Enclosure Heater 3-70 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Configuration Menu 3.4.5 Display Settings This function is used to customize the acronyms used throughout the Multi Host software application as well as the upper and lower limits used in the graphical displays. To edit an acronym or the minimum or maximum for graphical display, proceed as follows: 1. In the Configuration menu, select Display Settings. The box shown in Figure 3-76 on page 3-71 appears. Figure 3-76 - Display Settings Box 2. Select the desired parameter from the Description drop-down list. 3. Modify the following settings if desired: • • • • 4. Acronym Display Minimum Display Maximum Display Precision: Indicates the number of units after the decimal separator. Click Apply to save the settings. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-71 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus 3.5 OPTIONS MENU The Options menu includes five items: • • • • • Change Working Mode (Section 2.4.1 on page 2-13) Security (Section 2.2 on page 2-2) Connection (Section 2.4.2 on page 2-14) Embedded Version (Section 3.5.1 on page 3-72) Automatic Download (Section 3.5.2 on page 3-72) 3.5.1 Embedded Version This function is used to display the version number of the embedded firmware. In the Options menu select Embedded Version, and the box shown in Figure 3-77 on page 3-72 is displayed. Figure 3-77 - Embedded Version • To close the window, click OK. 3.5.2 Automatic Download This PC software application is used to configure a periodic (hourly or daily) schedule to download all history from selected Hydran M2 and Intellix MO150 Devices. Data can thus be downloaded from the Devices without user manual intervention. The Automatic Download uses the Multi Host’s Device configuration in System Manager for scheduling. Each Device should be configured in Figure 2-7 on page 2-9 prior to starting the Automatic Download Scheduler. 3-72 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Options Menu The Automatic Download runs automatically when the PC is restarted and resides in the system tray. In the Options menu select Automatic Download, and the window shown in Figure 3-78 on page 3-73 appears. Figure 3-78 - Automatic Download Window Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-73 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus To configure the Automatic Download Scheduler, proceed as follows: • Select Language: Select English or Spanish to display the captions in the desired language. Note: The default display is as per the regional settings and language selected in the Multi Host application. • • • • • • • • • • • Communication Server: Select the Communication Server in the drop-down list. Power Station: Select the Power Station in the drop-down list. Enabled: Click [] to select which Devices will be automatically downloaded. Status: Displays Waiting between the automatic downloads or Running during a download. Next Schedule: Displays when the next automatic download will take place for the Enabled Devices. Last Download Status: Displays Never Run Yet or the Device’s last downloaded status. Select [] Hourly or Weekly: – Hourly: Use the Up and Down arrows or enter values to set the Hrs and Mins. The Devices’ history will be automatically downloaded at every number of Mins configured if Hrs is set to 0, or at every number of Hrs and Mins configured if Hrs exceeds 0. – Weekly: Use the Up and Down arrows to select the day of the week or Everyday, and use the Up and Down arrows or enter values to set the Hrs and Mins. The Devices’ history will be automatically downloaded once a week or every day at the set day and time. Reset: To delete the Hourly or Weekly settings. Print Log: To print the log data, which is updated with the download status. Hide: To hide the Automatic Download window and move it to the Windows bottom right toolbar with icons. Manual Download: To manually download the history from the Enabled Devices. Note: This manual operation is independent of the Scheduler’s automatic downloads. • Save Schedule: To save the selected values for the daily or weekly downloads. 3-74 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Help Menu 3.6 HELP MENU The software version information as well as the General Electric Canada coordinates can be seen in the About box. In the Help menu select About, and box shown in Figure 3-79 on page 3-75 appears. Figure 3-79 - About Box Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 3-75 Chapter 3 • Buttons and Menus • The following information is shown: – The version number of the Multi Host software, the controller and the sensor card – The coordinates of General Electric Canada • Click System Info to view the local computer properties. • Click Ok to close the box. 3.7 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To obtain more information, please consult the following parts of this manual: • • • • Inputs required for each model: See Section 4.1 on page 4-1. Selecting a model: See Section 4.2 on page 4-4. Commands available for all graphs: See Chapter 5. Detailed explanations of the models, the required inputs, the models outputs and the associated alarms: See Chapter 6 to Chapter 15. • Troubleshooting: See Chapter 17. • Software License for the Multi Host software: See Appendix A. 3-76 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Chapter 4 Model Inputs and Selection In order to obtain valuable information about the real-time operating conditions of the transformer, the Device (Hydran M2 or Intellix MO150) uses many different monitoring models. Each one is defined as a specific computation or algorithm, and follows industryrecognized standards, such as the IEEE* and IEC* Loading Guides. Each model uses the data received from the sensors connected to the transformer, and makes computations to produce useful transformer information. The model gives results that can be compared with user-configurable alarm levels. This Chapter explains how to select one of the various models. Note: Configuration of the models is described in more detail in Section C.3 on page C-24. 4.1 INPUTS REQUIRED FOR EACH MODEL Each Device has enough inputs to enable many models simultaneously: • • • • Integrated analog inputs Current inputs Digital inputs set to cooling bank status Additional plug-in inputs, which may be set to analog or digital Note: A digital plug-in can have two digital inputs configured on one card. Table 4-1 on page 4-2 depicts the required and optional inputs for each model. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 4-1 Chapter 4 • Model Inputs and Selection Table 4-1 - Required and Optional Inputs for Each Model Digital Relative Humidity (%RH) Sensor Temperature (°C) Top Oil Temperature (°C) Load Current Winding H (A) Load Current Winding X (A) Load Current Winding Y (A) OLTC Tap Position OLTC Tank Temperature (°C) Ambient Temperature (°C) Bottom Oil Temperature (°C) Current Bank Feedback #1 Current Bank Feedback #2 Status of Cooling Bank #1 Status of Cooling Bank #2 Transformer Energized Analog Transformer Insulation Models: Winding H Apparent Power R Winding X Apparent Power R Winding Y Apparent Power R Winding H Hot-Spot Temperature R R Winding X Hot-Spot Temperature R Winding Y Hot-Spot Temperature R Insulation Aging R R R R Moisture and Bubbling R R R R Moisture Content in Insulating Barrier R R R R Dynamic Loading R R R R R O O O O R Cooling System Models: Cooling System Control R R O O O O R R O Cumulative Operation Time Cooling Efficiency O O R R R R R R R O Tap Changer Models: OLTC Position Tracking OLTC Temperature Differential 4-2 R R Rev. 7, December 2010 R Part 18415 Inputs Required for Each Model 4.1.1 Assigning Inputs The models are automatically enabled when the required inputs are configured. For instance, in order for the Winding Hot-Spot Temperature model to be enabled, you must navigate to the Setup tree (Figure 3-37 on page 3-37), click Input-Output Setup, and assign Top Oil Temp and a Winding Current to inputs. Once these are assigned, the Device dynamically enables the Winding Hot-Spot Temperature model. You may then click Models in the Setup tree to configure the model in question. The inputs to activate the models can be selected from a predefined list during input configuration. The list of analog inputs includes: • • • • • • • • • • • • Top Oil Temperature Bottom Oil Temperature OLTC Tank Temperature Ambient Temperature Tap position Winding H Current Winding X Current Winding Y Current Hydran PPM (from the Hydran M2) %RH Level (from the Hydran M2) %RH Sensor Temperature (from the Hydran M2) User-Defined The list of digital inputs includes: • • • • Cooling Bank 1 Cooling Bank 2 Transformer Energized User-Defined Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 4-3 Chapter 4 • Model Inputs and Selection 4.1.2 Input Alarms The inputs Top Oil Temp, Bottom Oil Temp and Ambient Temp all have input fault alarms that can be enabled or disabled. A lost input connection produces N/A values for the inputs as well as the corresponding models, thus the input fault alarms indicate that the input signal is unavailable. 4.2 MODEL SELECTION In the View menu select Models, or click the button shown on the right. The View Models window shown in Figure 4-1 on page 4-4 appears. Figure 4-1 - View Models Window With Real-Time Values 4-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Model Selection 4.2.1 Real Time Values By default, Real Time Values is selected in Figure 4-1 on page 4-4. To display a model’s real-time graph that is updated every 15 seconds, proceed as follows: • • • • Ensure Real Time Values is selected. Click the name of the desired real-time model on the left side. If Custom Screen is selected, see Section 3.3.3.1.1 on page 3-21. To close the window without generating a real-time graph, click Cancel. Note: The commands available for all graphs are described in Chapter 5. For detailed explanations of the models, the required inputs, the models outputs and the associated alarms, see Chapter 6 to Chapter 15. 4.2.2 Historic Values When the Historic Values mode is selected, the displayed readings and models are different from the ones available in real time. This feature is used to see all related historic records, even if the selected inputs are no longer connected. In the View Models window (Figure 4-1 on page 4-4), click Historic Values, and this window becomes as shown in Figure 4-2 on page 4-6. Note: Before trying to graph historic values, it is recommended to download all the history of the Device to have it available. To do so, refer to Section 3.3.4 on page 3-26. The Time Stamp and the Start Date are now enabled. Also, all the models now appear on the left side, to allow graphing historic values if they exist. • Ensure Historic Values is selected. • To display the historic values since a certain day, click Day and select the Start Date. This will graph the selected model’s values from that day to the last available entry. • To display the historic values since the beginning of a certain month, click Month and select the Start Date. This will graph the selected model’s values from the beginning of that month to the last available entry. • To display the historic values during a certain period, click Range and select the Start Date and then the End Date. This will graph the selected model’s values between the two dates. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 4-5 Chapter 4 • Model Inputs and Selection Figure 4-2 - View Models Window With Historic Values • Click the name of the desired model on the left side. • Depending on the date range selected, some history records could have to be downloaded. A confirmation box similar to Figure 3-23 on page 3-25 would appear. Click Yes. • During the download operation, a progress box similar to Figure 3-24 on page 3-25 is displayed and then disappears automatically. • If Custom Screen is selected, see Section 3.3.3.1.1 on page 3-21. • To close the window without generating a real-time graph, click Cancel. If no history is available for the desired period of time, the History not available message box shown in Figure 3-25 on page 3-26 appears. Click OK, and modify the Time Stamp, the Start Date and/or the End Date in Figure 4-2 on page 4-6. Note: The commands available for all graphs are described in Chapter 5. 4-6 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Additional Information For detailed explanations of the models, the required inputs, the models outputs and the associated alarms, see Chapter 6 to Chapter 15. 4.3 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To obtain more information, please consult the following parts of this manual: • Commands available for all graphs: See Chapter 5. • Detailed explanations of the models, the required inputs, the models outputs and the associated alarms: See Chapter 6 to Chapter 15. • Troubleshooting: See Chapter 17. • Software License for the Multi Host software: See Appendix A. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 4-7 Chapter 4 • Model Inputs and Selection PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 4-8 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Chapter 5 Commands Common to All Model Windows and Graphs The commands described in this Chapter apply to most monitoring models (from Chapter 6 to Chapter 15), and to all the graphs generated by the Multi Host software. The graph area of a typical model window is shown in Figure 5-1 on page 5-1. Figure 5-1 - Typical Graph Area 5.1 ANALOG SIGNAL DISPLAYS In most windows and graphs, an analog signal display is represented by a dial, as shown in Figure 5-2 on page 5-2. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 5-1 Chapter 5 • Commands Common to All Model Windows and Graphs Figure 5-2 - Analog Signal Display The following properties apply to all analog signal displays: • The colored line under the name is given by the Multi Host software and is the color of the curve for that signal (refer to Figure 5-1 on page 5-1). • The value (-16.1 in Figure 5-2 on page 5-2) and the needle indicate the reading for that signal at the present moment. • The limits for the scale (-50 and +210 °C in this case) are the maximum and minimum displayed values. To modify them, refer to Section 3.4.5 on page 3-71. • The colors green, yellow and red are delineated by the alarm set-points (180 and 200 °C in this case). 5.2 DIGITAL SIGNAL DISPLAYS In most windows and graphs, a digital signal display is represented as in Figure 5-3 on page 5-2. Figure 5-3 - Digital Signal Display The following properties apply to all digital signal displays: • The colored line under the name is given by the Multi Host software and is the color of the graph for that signal. 5-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Vertical Scales for Analog Signals • The value (Off in this case) indicates the status of that signal at the present moment. • The sensor is always shown with a green circle, whether it is On or Off. 5.3 VERTICAL SCALES FOR ANALOG SIGNALS A window or a graph can possess a maximum of ten vertical scales, including digital inputs (refer to Figure 5-1 on page 5-1). The following properties apply to the vertical scales for analog model values: • The number of vertical scales is equivalent to the number of signals displayed (one scale per signal). • The color of the vertical scale is given by the Multi Host software, and it is the same as the corresponding curve. • The limits for a vertical scale are the same as in the corresponding display above the chart, and they are the maximum and minimum displayed values. To modify them, refer to Section 3.4.5 on page 3-71. • There is a maximum of five vertical scales on the left side of the chart and a maximum of five vertical scales on the right side. • Above the chart (on top of Figure 5-1 on page 5-1), each of the small squares represents a curve. For each signal displayed, the corresponding square contains a button with the same color as the curve. • Click one of the small squares to depress it and the corresponding curve and vertical scale disappear from the chart (however, the corresponding display above the chart remains visible). When doing so, the vertical scales for the other curves remain on their respective side. Click a small square to press it and the corresponding curve and vertical scale reappear. • The vertical scale of any curve can be extended by clicking it and dragging it down, in order to improve the clarity of the corresponding curve. To return a vertical scale to its initial condition, click it and drag it up many times until there is no movement. 5.4 VERTICAL SCALES FOR DIGITAL SIGNALS Digital inputs can have an On or Off state only. The following properties apply to the vertical scales for digital model values: • All digital input curves use the same vertical scale labeled Digital Inputs. The even values on that scale represent the Normal state and the odd values on the scale represent the Non-Normal state. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 5-3 Chapter 5 • Commands Common to All Model Windows and Graphs • The color of the vertical scale is given by the Multi Host software, and it is the same as the corresponding curve. • The limits for the vertical digital scale are 0 and 14. • Above the chart, each of the small squares represents a curve. For each signal displayed, the corresponding square contains a button with the same color as the curve. • Click one of the small squares to depress it and the corresponding curve disappears from the chart (however, the corresponding display above the chart remains visible). When doing so, the vertical scales for the other curves remain on their respective side. Click a small square to press it and the corresponding curve reappears. 5.5 HORIZONTAL SCALE There is one horizontal time scale per graph, whatever the number of signals displayed (see Figure 5-1 on page 5-1). The following properties apply to the horizontal scale in all graphs: • If Real Time Values has been selected in Figure 4-1 on page 4-4, the horizontal scale extends from the time of the graph creation until now. • If Historic Values has been selected in Figure 4-1 on page 4-4, the horizontal scale covers the period of time selected. • A horizontal scale can be extended by clicking it and dragging it to the left or to the right, in order to improve the clarity of all curves. • When the horizontal scale is modified, all curves vary correspondingly. However, extending the scale beyond the initial start date does not allow to display older values. • To return the horizontal scale to its initial condition, click it and drag it to the left or to the right many times until the curves touch the left axis of the chart. You can also regenerate the graph. 5.6 ZOOM In addition to modifying the vertical and/or horizontal scales in a chart, the clarity of the various curves can also be improved by using the zoom function. To do so, move the cursor into the graph and click the left button of the mouse. Drag the cursor to the opposite corner of a window with the desired dimensions, and let go the left button of the mouse. The selected zoom area expands to cover the entire graph, and all curves and scales are modified accordingly. However, the displays above the chart do not change. This process can be repeated until a certain section of the graph is shown as desired. 5-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Additional Information To zoom out, move the cursor into the graph and click the right button of the mouse, as many times as wanted. To return a graph to its initial condition, click the right button of the mouse until both ends of the curves can be seen, and then draw a zoom window around the curves to zoom in; you can also regenerate the graph. Note: If you return a graph to its initial condition by zooming out, the range of the vertical and horizontal scales will probably vary slightly from those in the initial window. 5.7 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To obtain more information, please consult the following parts of this manual: • Detailed explanations of the models, the required inputs, the models outputs and the associated alarms: See Chapter 6 to Chapter 15. • Troubleshooting: See Chapter 17. • Software License for the Multi Host software: See Appendix A. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 5-5 Chapter 5 • Commands Common to All Model Windows and Graphs PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 5-6 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Chapter 6 Apparent Power Model The primary function of this model is to continuously monitor the load carried by the transformer in MVA (Mega Volt-Amperes). The Apparent Power can be computed on the primary, secondary, and tertiary windings, depending on the input configuration. The historic maximum MVA value is retained with a time stamp and can be reset. The current signal is a mandatory input, whereas the voltage signal is configured as a fixed value. Since voltage variations occurring in service and tap changer operations are not taken into consideration, the MVA is an approximate reading, and used only for display purposes. The sensors, rules and outputs of the Apparent Power model are illustrated in Figure 6-1 on page 6-1. More technical information is available in Section C.3.3 on page C-29. Figure 6-1 - Summary of the Apparent Power Model Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 6-1 Chapter 6 • Apparent Power Model 6.1 MODEL INPUTS For the Hydran M2: • H winding current (required) • X winding current (optional) • Y winding current (optional) For the Intellix MO150, no input needs to be configured since the current inputs are automatically configured. 6.2 PARAMETERS TO CONFIGURE Number of Phases: • Enter 1 phase for single-phase transformers. • Enter 3 phases for three-phase transformers. Rated Current on Windings H, X, Y and C: The rated load current for each winding is expressed in amperes (A) and is configurable from 1 to 5,000 A for the H winding, and from 1 to 50,000 A for the X and Y windings. The C winding is applicable only for autotransformers; it is configurable from 1 to 50,000 A. Before configuration, a default value of 250 A is shown for all current values. Rated Voltage on High Voltage Side, Rated Voltage on Low Voltage Side (optional) and Rated Voltage on Tertiary Side (optional): The rated voltage for each winding can be derived from the transformer nameplate. For three-phase transformers, the value written for the line-to-line voltage is required. For single-phase transformers, the value written for lineto-ground voltage is required for star windings, and the value written for line-to-line voltage is required for delta windings. These voltages are expressed in kilovolts (kV). The rated voltage is configurable from 10 to 1,500 kV for the H and X windings, and from 3 to 1,500 kV for the Y winding. Before configuration, a default value of 100 kV is shown. 6.3 MODEL OUTPUTS Winding H MVA: The historic maximum load value on the H winding with a time stamp. The load is expressed in Per Unit (p.u.) of rated current. This value is resettable. 6-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Main Window Winding X MVA (if the X winding current is configured as an input): The historic maximum load value on the X winding with a time stamp. The load is expressed in p.u. of rated current. This value is resettable. Winding Y MVA (if the Y winding current is configured as an input): The historic maximum load value on the Y winding with a time stamp. The load is expressed in p.u. of rated current. This value is resettable. 6.4 MAIN WINDOW The main window for the Apparent Power model is shown in Figure 6-2 on page 6-4. The commands applying to all monitoring models are explained in Chapter 5. By default, the following ten analog signals are displayed: • • • • • • • • • • Current winding H (minute-averaged value of the load current for phase H) Current winding X (minute-averaged value of the load current for phase X) Current winding Y (minute-averaged value of the load current for phase Y) Rated Voltage on HV side Rated Voltage on LV side Rated Voltage on Tertiary side Per Unit load on most loaded winding Apparent Power from H winding Apparent Power from X winding Apparent Power from Y winding Note: For the Hydran M2, if only one winding current is set as input, the Apparent Power model is still enabled, but only computes the parameters related to that winding as well as the Per Unit load on the most loaded winding. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 6-3 Chapter 6 • Apparent Power Model Figure 6-2 - Main Window for the Apparent Power Model 6-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Chapter 7 Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Model The rating of a transformer is closely linked to the winding temperature as it governs the insulation aging rate and bubbling release threshold. This winding temperature can also raise an alarm if excessively high values occur. In the industry standards, the winding temperature limit is defined as a temperature rise above the ambient air temperature. The cooling system is designed to ensure that at full load, the average winding temperature rise does not exceed the industry-accepted value (usually 65 °C). However it is not the average winding temperature that is of most interest but rather the temperature in the hottest area (the “hot-spot temperature”). This temperature cannot be measured directly as it is not possible to insert thermocouples in a winding that is to be put in service. It is possible to use fiber optic temperature sensors that do not interfere with dielectric strength but this procedure is costly and is usually limited to the validation of the manufacturer calculation methods. Therefore the traditional method was to use a Winding Temperature Indicator to fulfill that function. A more accurate and reliable evaluation of the hot-spot temperature can be provided, using the equations provided in the IEEE and IEC Loading Guides: • IEEE C57.91 - 1995, IEEE Guide for Loading Mineral-Oil-Immersed Transformers • IEC 60076-7 - 2005, Power Transformers - Part 7: Loading Guide for Oil-Immersed Power Transformers In the computation methods described in these Loading Guides, a key value is the temperature difference between the winding hot-spot and the top oil at rated conditions. This value is normally provided by the transformer manufacturer after suitable validation of their computation method. In the Winding Hot-Spot Temperature model, this rated value is corrected to account for actual load current and winding thermal time constant. The computed hot-spot temperature rise is then added to the measured top oil temperature to provide the actual winding hottest-spot temperature. The winding hot-spot temperature is computed separately for each winding. The highest value of winding hot-spot temperature is identified and used to raise an alarm signal on the Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 7-1 Chapter 7 • Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Model transformer. The hottest winding might not always be the same, depending on the load on the tertiary winding and on the position of the tap changer. For autotransformers, the winding hot-spot temperature is calculated for the series winding (H), the common winding (C) and the tertiary winding (Y). The current in the common winding is calculated by subtracting the secondary load current minus the primary load current. The sensors, rules and outputs of the Winding Hot-Spot Temperature model are illustrated in Figure 7-1 on page 7-2. Note: More technical information is available in Section C.3.4 on page C-30. Figure 7-1 - Summary of the Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Model 7.1 MODEL INPUTS For the Hydran M2: • • • • Top oil temperature H winding current (required) X winding current (optional) Y winding current (optional) For the Intellix MO150, only the Top oil temperature needs to be configured since the current inputs are automatically configured. 7-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Parameters to Configure 7.2 PARAMETERS TO CONFIGURE Transformer Type: Select between Standard Transformer and Autotransformer, in order to calculate correctly the load current in the common winding of autotransformers. Rated Current on Winding H, Rated Current on Winding X (optional for the Hydran M2) and Rated Current on Winding Y (optional for the Hydran M2): For each winding, the rated current on the top cooling mode is to be used. These values are available from the transformer nameplate. The rated load current is expressed in amperes (A) and is configurable from 1 to 5,000 A for the H winding, and from 1 to 50,000 A for the X and Y windings. Before configuration, a default value of 250 A is used. Winding Exponent: The winding exponent “m” relates the hot-spot rise above top oil to the load level. It is normally calculated only for the top cooling mode. It can be derived from the temperature rise tests under several load levels. If no information is available, a default value of 0.8 can be used for the ONAN, ONAF and OFAF cooling types, and a default value of 1.0 can be used for the ODAF cooling type. This value is configurable between 0.5 and 1.0, and the system default value is 0.9. Winding Time Constant: The winding has its own thermal capacity that delays somewhat the temperature changes caused by load variations. This delay is significant only during sudden overloads of high magnitude. Specific values can be obtained from the manufacturer or by analysis of results from temperature rise tests. A default value of 6 minutes is conservative and acceptable in most cases. This value is configurable from 0.1 to 20 minutes and the system default value is 6 minutes. Rated Hot-Spot Rise Above Top Oil in Winding H, Rated Hot-Spot Rise Above Top Oil in Winding X (optional for the Hydran M2) and Rated Hot-Spot Rise Above Top Oil in Winding Y (optional for the Hydran M2): The winding hottest-spot temperature rise above top oil is needed on the top cooling mode, at rated load, for each winding to be monitored. On recent units, these values should appear on the reports for temperature rise tests (heat run test). Otherwise they have to be obtained from the manufacturer. These values are critical for winding hot-spot calculation and an effort should be made to get the proper values. As a last resort, an approximate value can be obtained from calculations as recommended in the IEEE and IEC Loading Guides. This value is configurable from 1 to 50 °C and the system default value is 30 °C. Rated Hot-Spot Rise Above Top Oil in Winding C (optional): Winding C is applicable only for autotransformers. For this type of unit, the H winding is considered as the series Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 7-3 Chapter 7 • Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Model winding and the current in the common winding is calculated by subtracting the LV current minus the HV current. The winding hot-spot rise is similar as for a regular transformer. 7.3 MODEL OUTPUTS Winding Hot-Spot Temperature in Winding H Winding Hot-Spot Temperature in Winding X (if load current X is configured as an input) Winding Hot-Spot Temperature in Winding Y (if load current Y is configured as an input) Winding Hot-Spot Temperature in Winding C (if load current C is configured as an input and Transformer type is Autotransformer) Historic Maximum Value of Winding H Hot-Spot Temperature, Historic Maximum Value of Winding X Hot-Spot Temperature, Historic Maximum Value of Winding Y Hot-Spot Temperature and Historic Maximum Value of Winding C Hot-Spot Temperature with time stamps: These values are resettable. Highest Winding Hot-Spot Temperature 7.4 ASSOCIATED ALARMS Top Oil Temperature Hi and Hi-Hi Alarms: These values are configurable from 50 to 200 °C. The system default values are 85 °C for the Hi alarm and 95 °C for the Hi-Hi alarm. These alarms come with a deadband configurable from 0 to 15 °C (default: 2 °C) to avoid oscillation of the alarm signal. A time delay, configurable from 0 to 30 minutes (default: 1 minute), is also provided for the same purpose. Winding Hot Spot Hi and Hi-Hi Alarms: These alarms are sensitive to all windings being monitored and react to the hottest winding temperature. These values are configurable from 70 to 170 °C. The system default values are 110 °C for the Hi alarm (this is the rated temperature for thermally-upgraded paper) and 120 °C for the Hi-Hi alarm. These alarms come with a deadband configurable from 0 to 15 °C (default: 2 °C) to avoid oscillation of the alarm signal. A time delay, configurable from 0 to 30 minutes (default: 1 minute), is also provided for the same purpose. Note: Appendix E presents the list of all alarm messages that can appear on the Multi Host software. 7-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Main Window 7.5 MAIN WINDOW The main window for the Winding Hot-Spot Temperature model is shown in Figure 7-2 on page 7-5. The commands applying to all monitoring models are explained in Chapter 5. Figure 7-2 - Main Window for the Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Model By default, the following eight analog signals are displayed: • • • • • Top Oil Temperature Current Winding H Current Winding X Current Winding Y Winding Hot-Spot Temperature in winding H Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 7-5 Chapter 7 • Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Model • Winding Hot-Spot Temperature in winding X • Winding Hot-Spot Temperature in winding Y • Highest Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Note: For the Hydran M2, if only one winding current is set as input, the Winding Hot-Spot Temperature model is still enabled but only computes the parameters related to that winding as well as the Per Unit load on the most loaded winding. 7-6 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Chapter 8 Insulation Aging Model Winding insulation is made of oil-impregnated cellulose material. In order to properly fulfill its function, this material must have a certain mechanical strength and flexibility. These properties depend on the length of the cellulose chain constituent of the paper and pressboard. With time and temperature, these long polymer chains break down into shorter segments, a process called depolymerization. The practical effect is that the paper loses its flexibility and tensile strength to become a brittle material. The winding is continuously submitted to clamping forces and vibrations. Moreover, during short-circuit on the system, these forces are increased tremendously and if the insulating paper is too brittle, it may rupture under the pressure and create a weak point in the insulation that will later allow flashover between adjacent turns when a voltage surge occurs on the transformer. This insulation aging process is irreversible. It is also the main factor determining the transformer’s end of life. The rate of aging of cellulose insulation material is a function of the following factors: • Insulation temperature at the hot spot: The effect of temperature is the most important, as described in the IEEE and IEC Loading Guides. The effect of temperature on aging is a function of the type of paper. It is therefore important to state in the configuration page the type of paper used for winding insulation. • Water content in the winding insulation paper: It is assumed that the aging acceleration factor is directly proportional to the water content with 0.5 % as reference value for dry paper. The water content in winding insulation is computed in the Moisture Content in Insulating Barrier model (Chapter 10). The effect is more severe on normal Kraft paper than on thermally-upgraded paper and it can be practically neglected on Aramid paper. • Oxygen content of the insulating oil: This oxygen content can be inferred from the type of oil preservation system. The IEEE Loading Guide recommends using an aging acceleration factor of 2.5 for free-breathing conservators while the sealed-type transformers and those with a membrane in the conservator are practically oxygen-free. The sensors, rules and outputs of the Insulation Aging model are illustrated in Figure 8-1 on page 8-2. Note: More technical information is available in Section C.3.5 on page C-37. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 8-1 Chapter 8 • Insulation Aging Model Figure 8-1 - Summary of the Insulation Aging Model 8.1 MODEL INPUTS For the Hydran M2: • • • • • • Top oil temperature H winding current (required) X winding current (optional) Y winding current (optional) %RH level (from the Hydran M2) %RH sensor temperature (from the Hydran M2) For the Intellix MO150: • Top oil temperature • %RH level (either from the Hydran S2 or needs to be configured as an input) • %RH sensor temperature (either from the Hydran S2 or needs to be configured as an input) • The current inputs, which are automatically configured 8-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Parameters to Configure 8.2 PARAMETERS TO CONFIGURE Aging Calculation Method and Type of Paper: The selection of the paper type is tied directly to the selection of the aging calculation method: • Select IEC 65 °C rise for units built according to IEC rules with a 65 °C average winding rise and a maximum rated winding hot-spot temperature of 98 °C. • Select IEEE 55 °C rise for older units built according to IEEE rules with a 55 °C average winding rise and a maximum rated winding hot-spot temperature of 95 °C. • Select IEEE 65 °C rise as defined in the IEEE Loading Guide for transformers with a 65 °C average winding rise and a maximum rated winding hot-spot temperature of 110 °C. • Select Nomex aging for winding insulation made of Aramid paper with a maximum rated winding hot-spot temperature of 188 °C. Some newly-built transformers are specified with a 55 °C average winding rise although they use thermally-upgraded insulating paper that would allow the transformer to operate at 65 °C for normal life duration. Selecting a lower-rated temperature rise provides longer life duration in those applications where the ambient temperature is expected to be very high. In such case, the type of paper should be configured as IEEE 65 °C rise. Some transformers are specified according to IEC standard with the addition of thermally upgraded paper. In this case, the rated hot-spot temperature is 110 °C and the IEEE 65 °C rise formula should be used for aging calculation. Previous Aging: The previous aging can be configured when a monitoring system is retrofitted on an existing transformer. When a monitoring system is installed on a transformer that has been in service for some time, you may wish to enter in the cumulative aging counter the thermal aging incurred before commissioning of the monitoring system. You must estimate this aging from the loading history, the ambient temperature, the estimated water content in the winding insulation, and the oxygen content in the oil. When only subsequent aging is to be reported, a value of 0 hours is used for this configuration field. The Previous Aging value is configurable from 0 to 40,000 days and the default value is 0 days. Oil Preservation System: The type of oil preservation system has a direct influence on the amount of oxygen dissolved in the transformer oil, thus determining the aging acceleration Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 8-3 Chapter 8 • Insulation Aging Model factor used in the calculation of the Global Aging Acceleration factor. The aging acceleration factor used by the Device is as follows: • 1 for a sealed tank or a conservator with membrane • 2.5 for a free-breathing conservator Previous Service Time: The Service Time represents the number of days the transformer has been in service regardless of the load level, prior to the commissioning of the monitoring system. When only subsequent aging is to be reported, a value of 0 hours should be used for this configuration. This value is configurable from 0 to 40,000 days with a default value of 0 days. 8.3 MODEL OUTPUTS Thermal Aging Acceleration Factor: It considers only the hot-spot current temperature. Moisture Aging Acceleration Factor: It considers only the effect of moisture in paper. Global Aging Acceleration Factor: This is the actual aging rate or aging acceleration factor, considering the cumulated effect of temperature, moisture and oxygen in oil. Cumulative Aging: This field indicates the aging cumulated since the commissioning of the system, adding the “Previous Aging” if this value was configured on the Insulation Aging Model configuration page. The value is expressed in days of operation at rated temperature; for instance, a transformer with thermally upgraded paper operating 24 hours at 117 °C will undergo 2 days of “normal aging at rated temperature.” Service Time: This field indicates the number of days the transformer has been in service since the commissioning of the system, adding the “Previous Service Time” if this value has been configured. 8.4 MAIN WINDOW The main window for the Insulation Aging model is shown in Figure 8-2 on page 8-5. The commands applying to all monitoring models are explained in Chapter 5. By default, the following three analog signals are displayed: • Highest winding hot-spot temperature 8-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Main Window • Global aging acceleration factor • Moisture content in winding paper Figure 8-2 - Main Window for the Insulation Aging Model Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 8-5 Chapter 8 • Insulation Aging Model PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 8-6 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Chapter 9 Moisture and Bubbling Model The moisture content of the oil and the solid insulation is a serious concern for power transformers, especially for aging units. Extensive drying procedures are applied at the manufacturing stage and sustained efforts are deployed in service to maintain a high level of dryness. However, with time, water can penetrate through various paths such as the air breather and leaky gaskets. Aging of cellulose also releases some water. Moisture tends to accumulate in the solid insulation and leads to several detrimental consequences, namely: • • • • Acceleration of insulation aging Risk of water vapor bubbles being released from the winding insulation Reductions of dielectric strength of insulating barriers Risk of water condensation in transformer oil at low temperatures Moisture content assessment is too often derived from a single oil sample submitted to a Karl Fischer test in laboratory. This is a valid approach for oil evaluation but it does not allow evaluation of the moisture content in the solid insulation as the rate of water exchange between the oil and the paper has to be considered. On-line monitoring of moisture in oil allows the integration of temperature variations and the computation of a dependable value for moisture content in the various components of the solid insulation system, even if they are at different temperatures and characterized by different diffusion rates. The most critical part of the winding insulation is the top of the winding that operates at the hot-spot temperature. This is the area where the aging is most severe, and the effect of the water content can be computed. The determination of the critical temperature for bubble evolution takes into account the atmospheric pressure, the oil pressure above the hot-spot area, and the amount of gas dissolved in the oil. The moisture sensor continuously monitors the oil’s temperature and relative moisture saturation at the sensor location. A filtering is applied to remove the effect of cyclic heating created by the sensor to ensure oil circulation. This filtered value is used to calculate the absolute value of the water content in the oil, the temperature of water condensation, and the relative saturation at the reference temperature. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 9-1 Chapter 9 • Moisture and Bubbling Model Since the oil and winding temperature varies continuously, this moving target is used with an integrating algorithm taking into account the diffusion time constant and the temperature. The calculated value of the water content in the winding insulation allows prediction of the bubbling temperature. It is also used in the Insulation Aging model (Chapter 8). The sensors, rules and outputs of the Moisture and Bubbling model are illustrated in Figure 9-1 on page 9-2. Note: More technical information is available in Section C.3.6 on page C-39. Figure 9-1 - Summary of the Moisture and Bubbling Model 9.1 MODEL INPUTS For the Hydran M2: • • • • Top oil temperature Winding current %RH level (from the Hydran M2) %RH sensor temperature (from the Hydran M2) 9-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Parameters to Configure For the Intellix MO150: • Top oil temperature • %RH level (either from the Hydran S2 or needs to be configured as an input) • %RH sensor temperature (either from the Hydran S2 or needs to be configured as an input) • The current inputs, which are automatically configured 9.2 PARAMETERS TO CONFIGURE Height of Oil Above the Hot Spot Area: This value is used in the calculation of the bubbling threshold temperature. The oil column above the winding creates a pressure that prevents the release of free gas bubbles. This value is configurable from 0 to 5 meters and the default value is 2 meters. Type of Oil: In order to convert the relative oil saturation (RH%) into the absolute water content in oil (ppm), it is necessary to know the water saturation curve of the oil. This curve varies with the type of oil (naphtaneic, aromatic, vegetable or silicon) that has been selected in the general transformer configuration page. If you wish to define the water solubility curve, it can be done by providing specific values for the factors A, B and C in the water solubility function: ppm = RH% * EXP(B-A/(273.16 + hot-spot temperature)) + C These parameters can be configured using the limits shown in Table 9-1 on page 9-3. The default values correspond to naphtaneic oil. Table 9-1 - Minimum, Maximum and Default Values for the Factors A, B and C Part 18415 Minimum Value Maximum Value Default Value A 1,000 10,000 4,107.18 B 10 25 17.749 C 0 10 2.41 Rev. 7, December 2010 9-3 Chapter 9 • Moisture and Bubbling Model Standard Temperature for RH: This value is used to convert the measured relative saturation (RH%) to a relative saturation at a reference temperature. This reference temperature can be configured from 0 to 40 °C with a default value of 20 °C. Altitude of the Transformer Type of Oil Preservation System 9.3 MODEL OUTPUTS Highest WHST Moisture Content in Winding Paper: This value is expressed in percentage weight by weight. Moisture Content in Barrier Water-Oil Condensation Temperature: This is the critical temperature (in °C) for the formation of free water in the insulating oil when a wet transformer is allowed to cool down rapidly. If the water dissolved in the oil does not have sufficient time to migrate back to the cellulose insulation, droplets of free water may precipitate in the oil. This would create a hazard for dielectric failure should the transformer be reenergized in this condition. Winding Bubbling Temperature: Residual moisture in the winding insulation can release free gas bubbles if the hot-spot temperature is too high or increasing rapidly. The bubble inception temperature is a function of the moisture content in the paper and also the oil pressure and partial vapor pressure in the area of the winding hot-spot. Winding Bubbling Temperature Margin: This is the difference between the bubbling inception temperature and the actual winding hot-spot temperature. H2O PPM Hourly Average 9.4 ASSOCIATED ALARMS Water-in-Oil Condensation Temperature Alarm: This alarm is normally set to alert the operator when the condensation temperature exceeds the minimum temperature that can be observed on the transformer, should it be suddenly removed from service. This value can be configured from -40 to +20 °C with a default value of -20 °C. 9-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Main Window Bubbling Temperature Margin Alarm: A significant margin should be maintained at all times to avoid the occurrence of free bubbles circulating in the cooling oil. This margin can be configured from 0 to 50 °C with a default value of 20 °C. Note: Appendix E presents the list of all alarm messages that can appear on the Multi Host software. 9.5 MAIN WINDOW The main window for the Moisture and Bubbling model is shown in Figure 9-2 on page 9-5. The commands applying to all monitoring models are explained in Chapter 5. Figure 9-2 - Main Window for the Moisture and Bubbling Model Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 9-5 Chapter 9 • Moisture and Bubbling Model By default, the following ten outputs are displayed: • • • • • • • • • • % RH Level % RH Sensor Temperature Highest WHST Moisture Content in Winding Paper Moisture Content in Barrier Water-Oil Condensation Temperature Winding Bubbling Temperature Winding Bubbling Temperature Margin H2O PPM Level H2O PPM Hourly Average 9-6 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Chapter 10 Moisture Content in Insulating Barrier Model The moisture content in the solid insulation can significantly reduce the dielectric strength of the components submitted to high electric fields. This effect is especially critical for partial discharges inception on barriers that provide insulation between the windings and that can be submitted to tangential electric fields. The most critical pressboard barriers are at the bottom oil temperature because this is the coolest area and this is where the moisture content in solid insulation is the highest. Ideally, a sensor providing a measured value of the bottom oil temperature should be connected as an input. If this is not available, the Device uses a calculated value that takes into account the load, the cooling stage, the rated top oil rise and the rated bottom oil rise under each cooling mode, as well as the effect of the altitude on the cooling characteristics. Knowing the bottom oil temperature, the relative oil saturation in this area can be calculated. The oil-to-paper equilibrium curves providing an ultimate value of the moisture in the paper at those conditions would be maintained continuously. The value of the water content in pressboard barriers can be used to evaluate the reduction of dielectric strength of this component. The sensors, rules and outputs of the Moisture Content in Insulating Barrier model are illustrated in Figure 10-1 on page 10-2. Note: More technical information is available in Section C.3.7 on page C-40. 10.1 • • • • • MODEL INPUTS Top oil temperature Load current on Winding H Bottom oil temperature Fan feedback status of cooling bank #1 (optional) Fan feedback status of cooling bank #2 (optional) Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 10-1 Chapter 10 • Moisture Content in Insulating Barrier Model Figure 10-1 - Summary of the Moisture Content in Insulating Barrier Model 10.2 PARAMETERS TO CONFIGURE IF NO BOTTOM OIL MEASUREMENT IS AVAILABLE Load Losses on Top Cooling Stage: This value is needed to calculate the temperature drop between the measured top oil temperature and the calculated bottom oil temperature. It can be configured from 10 to 10,000 kW with a default value of 500 kW. No Load Losses at Rated Voltage: This value is needed to calculate the temperature drop between the measured top oil temperature and the calculated bottom oil temperature. It can be configured from 2 to 2,000 kW with a default value of 100 kW. Rated Power at Cooling Stage 0: The cooling stage 0 is defined as the lowest cooling stage that can be used on a transformer. It can be the ONAN mode, or OFAN if there are some oil pumps. Stages 1 and 2 are under the control of the cooling system control but stage 0 is not under this control. Some transformers have only one cooling stage (typically GSU with OFWF cooling mode); in this case, the rated power is to be configured as cooling stage 0. The rated power under cooling stage 0 can be found on the transformer’s nameplate. It can be configured from 1 to 600 MVA with a default value of 100 MVA. Rated Power at Cooling Stage 1: In general, cooling stage 1 can be initiated by activating either cooling bank 1 or 2. It is therefore necessary to distinguish between cooling bank and cooling stage. The rated power under cooling stage 1 is to be found on the transformer’s nameplate. It can be configured from 1 to 800 MVA with a default value of 150 MVA. 10-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Parameters to Configure If No Bottom Oil Measurement Is Available Some transformers have only one cooling bank that can be controlled; in this case, the two rated values indicated on the nameplate are to be configured as cooling stages 0 and 1. Rated Power at Cooling Stage 2: The cooling stage 2 is available when both cooling banks are in service. The rated power at cooling stage 2 can be found on the transformer’s nameplate. It can be configured from 1 to 1,000 MVA with a default value of 200 MVA. Oil Exponent at Cooling Stage 0, Oil Exponent at Cooling Stage 1 and Oil Exponent at Cooling Stage 2: The oil exponent is a parameter defining the relation between the load and the top oil temperature rise. This value is configurable from 0.5 to 1.0 with a default value of 0.8. The best method to establish this value is to run several temperature rise tests as described in IEEE C57.119 - Recommended Practices for Performing Temperature Rise Tests on Oil-Immersed Power Transformers at Loads Beyond Nameplate Rating. Otherwise, the following approximate oil exponent values related to the cooling mode of each cooling stage can be used: • 0.8 for the ONAN cooling mode • 0.9 for the ONAF, OFAN, OFAF and OFWF cooling modes • 1.0 for the ODAN, ODAF and ODWF cooling modes Rated Top Oil Rise at Cooling Stage 0, Rated Top Oil Rise at Cooling Stage 1 and Rated Top Oil Rise at Cooling Stage 2: This is the top oil temperature rise over the ambient temperature, when the transformer is loaded at the rated load applicable to cooling stage 0. This value can be found on the transformer’s temperature rise test report if such test has been done on cooling stage 0. If not, the value can be obtained from the manufacturer or estimated from similar transformers. This value is configurable from 20 to 80 °C with a default value of 55 °C. Altitude of the Transformer: As the altitude increases, the air density reduces and cooling is less efficient. The altitude value allows the Device to calculate a reduced value of the rated current that will produce the same top oil temperature rise. The correction factor varies with the type of cooling, in line with IEEE C57.91 - 1995. The altitude value is configurable from 0 to 5,000 meters with a default value of 500 meters. Rated Bottom Oil Rise at Cooling Stage 0, Rated Bottom Oil Rise at Cooling Stage 1 and Rated Bottom Oil Rise at Cooling Stage 2: This is the difference between the oil temperature at the bottom of the transformer and the ambient temperature, when the transformer is loaded at the rated load, applicable to cooling stage 0. This value can be found on the transformer’s temperature rise test report if such test has been done on cooling Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 10-3 Chapter 10 • Moisture Content in Insulating Barrier Model stage 0. If not, the value can be obtained from the manufacturer or estimated from similar transformers. This value is configurable from 10 to 60 °C with a default value of 25 °C. 10.3 MODEL OUTPUTS • Calculated Bottom Oil Temperature (if the bottom oil temperature is not available as an input) • Moisture Content in Insulating Barrier • Moisture Content in Insulating Barrier Valid Delay 10.4 MAIN WINDOW The Moisture Content in Insulating Barrier model is displayed in the main window for the Moisture and Bubbling model, shown in Figure 9-2 on page 9-5. The commands applying to all monitoring models are explained in Chapter 5. By default, the following two outputs are displayed: • Moisture Content in Insulating Barrier • Calculated Bottom Oil Temperature 10-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Chapter 11 Dynamic Loading Model The purpose of this model is to provide the transformer owner and operator with a continuous estimation of the capacity of the transformer (and its associated components) to continue safe operation under overloading conditions. Starting with current conditions of oil temperature and ambient temperature and using a steady load of a given magnitude, the model computes how long this load can be carried until a limit condition is reached. The implementation of this model in the Hydran M2 With Models and Intellix MO150 Devices is also known as “Time vs. Steady Load.” This model is intended for short-duration overloads, as when a parallel transformer is removed from service for maintenance for a few hours or less. Model computations are made with the assumption that the transformer is operating on the top-cooling mode. Computations of the top oil and winding temperatures are carried out according to Section 7.2 of IEEE C57.91-1995, Guide for Loading Mineral-Oil-Immersed Transformers. A similar calculation method is described in Section 8.2.2 of IEC 60076-7, Loading Guide for Oil-Immersed Power Transformers. Calculation starts with a Load of 1.1 p.u. and actual values for Ambient Temperature and Top Oil Temperature (from sensors). The ambient temperature is assumed to remain constant for the period of overload being considered. The actual top oil temperature will be used as a starting point for oil temperature calculation at each load level. Calculations are done with this Load level (1.1 p.u.) and with a time increment of 0.1 hour (6 minutes) until one of the Limiting Factors (or Overload Limit) is exceeded or when the acceptable duration exceeds 12 hours (720 minutes). The calculation is then repeated with a Load of 1.2 p.u. and the acceptable duration is determined (less or equal to 720 minutes) again along with the Limiting Factor that was first reached. This calculation is repeated until a Load of 2.0 p.u. is reached. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 11-1 Chapter 11 • Dynamic Loading Model For each Load level, the time duration to reach the limit is recorded along with the Limiting Factor that was first reached. If the 12 hours (720 minutes) were reached but no Limiting Factor was exceeded, the Limiting Factor is shown as “Duration.” If the Hydran M2 With Models and Intellix MO150 Devices are working in the on-line mode of operation (see Section 2.4 on page 2-12), then the computation is repeated every 10 minutes using the actual sensor values. If the Hydran M2 With Models and Intellix MO150 Devices are working in the off-line mode of operation, then the output screen reflects the values computed during the last on-line operation. The sensors, rules and outputs of the Dynamic Loading model are illustrated in Figure 11-1 on page 11-2. Note: More technical information is available in Section C.3.13 on page C-59. Figure 11-1 - Summary of the Dynamic Loading Model 11-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Model Inputs 11.1 MODEL INPUTS • Load value: Fixed, incremented during computations, ranging from 1.1 to 2.0 p.u in 0.1-p.u. steps • Time increment during computations: Ranging from 0 to 720 minutes in 6-minute steps • Ambient temperature sensor (required) • Top oil temperature sensor (required) • Current winding H sensor (required) • Current winding X or C sensor (optional) • Current winding Y sensor (optional) • Rated hot-spot rise above top oil in winding H, winding X/C and winding Y: Based on transformer type (from WHST and Transformer Type setup) • Rated load current on the hottest winding (from Winding Current setup) • Winding exponent (from WHST and Transformer Type setup) • Winding time constant (from WHST and Transformer Type setup) • Transformer type (from WHST and Transformer Type setup) 11.2 PARAMETERS TO CONFIGURE Transformer Tag: Text value, for description purpose only, used in the model graphical representation. From the transformer nameplate, test reports, transformer specifications or transformer maintenance manual: • Top Cooling Stage: 0, 1 or 2. The value is read-only and is determined by the number of cooling banks (configured in Cooling Banks Status setup): – 0 if no digital input is connected for the cooling banks. – 1 if only one cooling bank is connected. – 2 if two cooling banks are connected via the corresponding digital inputs. • Rated Power at the Top Cooling Stage 0, 1 or 2 (in MVA). For stages 1 and 2, this parameter is also configured in the Cooling Efficiency model. • Rated Top Oil Temperature Rise at Top Cooling Stage 0, 1 or 2 (in °C). For stages 1 and 2, this parameter is also configured in the Cooling Efficiency model. • Oil Exponent at Top Cooling Stage 0, 1 or 2. For stages 1 and 2, this parameter is also configured in the Cooling Efficiency model. • Rated Top Oil Temperature Time Constant (in hours). This parameter is also configured in the Cooling Efficiency model. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 11-3 Chapter 11 • Dynamic Loading Model • Load Losses on Top Cooling Stage and No-Load Losses at Rated Voltage (in kW). These parameters are also configured in the Moisture Content in Barrier setup. • User Estimate of Water Content in Winding Insulation Paper (in the area of the hottest spot). This is a manual input required to assess the bubbling temperature and the aging acceleration factor related to moisture. Range: 0.1–10 % w/w, default: 0.5 % w/w. From the bushing nameplate: • • • • Rated continuous current of HV bushing Rated continuous current of HV winding Rated continuous current of LV bushing Rated continuous current of LV winding From the OLTC nameplate: • Rated current of OLTC • Rated current of corresponding winding Overload Limits: • Maximum Top Oil Temperature: During overloads, the top oil temperature must be limited if excessive oxidation and risk of oil overflow are to be avoided. • Maximum Hot Spot Temperature: The winding hot-spot temperature is usually considered the most important factor to be used in transformer overloading. Beyond 150 °C, the thermal degradation rate increases rapidly and operators usually try to avoid this condition. • Minimum Bubbling Temperature: The bubbling temperature is computed from the water content in the insulating paper. To avoid the risk of bubbling at all times during overload occurrences, a margin must be kept between the bubbling temperature and the actual hot-spot temperature. Many users apply a 20-°C margin. • Maximum Load of the HV Bushings: They usually have a larger current rating than the HV winding. However, the User may wish to limit further the acceptable load factor on the HV bushing because of shorter time constant, suspicious conditions or other reasons. • Maximum Load of the LV Bushings: They usually have a larger current rating than the LV winding. However, the User may wish to limit further the acceptable load factor on the LV bushing because of shorter time constant, suspicious conditions or other reasons. • Maximum Load of the Tap Changer: They usually have a larger current rating than the winding where they are connected. However, the User may wish to limit differently the overload factor depending on the tap changer conditions. 11-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Model Outputs To configure the above values for a selected Device, in the Configuration menu select Setup then Models and in the tree select Dynamic Loading Setup. A setup window similar to Figure 11-2 on page 11-5 is displayed. Figure 11-2 - Dynamic Loading Model Setup Window 11.3 MODEL OUTPUTS • An array of 10 calculated Overload Time values (each Overload Time value is calculated for the correspondent incremental Load value of 0.1 p.u in the range 1.1 to 2.0 p.u.) • An array of 10 indications for the corresponding Overload Limit reached (including the maximum time duration of 720 minutes) • An array with 10 values containing one of the values calculated below or the value 720 (that is, the maximum duration time): Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 11-5 Chapter 11 • Dynamic Loading Model – – – – 11.4 Top Oil Temperature value corresponding to the Calculated Overload Time Winding Hot-Spot Temperature value corresponding to the Calculated Overload Time Bubbling Margin Temperature value corresponding to the Calculated Overload Time Bushing and Tap Changer Load values corresponding to the Calculated Overload Time ASSOCIATED ALARMS There is no alarm associated with the Dynamic Loading model. 11.5 MAIN WINDOW The main window for the Dynamic Loading model is shown in Figure 11-3 on page 11-7. It contains three areas: • Transformer Conditions, displaying: – Transformer Tag: For transformer identification. – Rated Power at Top Cooling Stage (in MVA): For information only (not used in the computation). – Rated Voltage on HV side (in kV): For information only (not used in the computation). – Rated Voltage on LV side (in kV): For information only (not used in the computation). – Ambient temperature (in °C): Assumed to remain constant through the overload period. This parameter is measured by a dedicated sensor. – Top oil temperature (in °C): Assumed to remain constant through the overload period. This parameter is measured by a dedicated sensor. – User-Estimated Water in Winding Paper (in % w/w): An indication of the winding paper moisture to be correlated with the bubbling temperature calculation results. – Number of Cooling Banks: Indicates the Top Cooling Mode (or Stage). • Acceptable Overload Duration: The duration (in minutes) and the limit reached are presented in tabular form for loads from 1.1 to 2.0 p.u. in 0.1-p.u. increments. • A graph containing the representation of the duration (in minutes, on the Y axis) as a function of the load (in p.u., on the X axis). 11-6 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Main Window Figure 11-3 - Main Window for the Dynamic Loading Model Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 11-7 Chapter 11 • Dynamic Loading Model PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 11-8 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Chapter 12 Cooling Efficiency Model This model computes the top oil temperature that should be expected considering the load current, the ambient temperature, the cooling mode, the oil time constant and the altitude. The calculated value is then compared with the measured value and an alarm is raised if the transformer is found to be overheating. This calculation is used to detect obstructions, such as dirt on the coolers, which could be a limiting factor when the transformer is required to operate at full load or under overload conditions. During the initial model computation, the measured values of top oil temperature and ambient temperature are used to provide a starting point for the calculated value of top oil temperature rise. From then on, the calculated temperature at the end of the time interval is used as the initial temperature for the next time interval. This calculation is run with load current in the H winding only. The rated current for each cooling stage is calculated from the rated power on each stage and the rated current on the top cooling stage. The ultimate temperature rise and the current temperature rise are calculated considering the actual cooling stage and the actual oil time constant. This value is added to the ambient temperature to provide a calculated top oil temperature. This value is subtracted from the measured top oil temperature and the difference is averaged over a configurable period. An alarm is raised when the difference exceeds a configured value for a period of time that is also configurable. The model can accommodate a transformer with one, two or three cooling stages. Note: If the transformer is not energized, it is important to remove the core losses when calculating the top oil temperature. Otherwise a false alarm could be generated. The sensors, rules and outputs of the Cooling Efficiency model are illustrated in Figure 12-1 on page 12-2. Note: More technical information is available in Section C.3.8 on page C-45. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 12-1 Chapter 12 • Cooling Efficiency Model Figure 12-1 - Summary of the Cooling Efficiency Model 12.1 MODEL INPUTS For the Hydran M2: • • • • • • Top oil temperature Load current on winding H Ambient temperature Fan feedback status of cooling bank 1 Fan feedback status of cooling bank 2 Transformer Energized status (optional) For the Intellix MO150: • • • • • Top oil temperature Ambient temperature Transformer Energized status (optional) Load current on winding H, Status Cooling Bank #1 and Status Cooling Bank #2, which are automatically configured 12.2 PARAMETERS TO CONFIGURE Rated Current in Winding H on Top Cooling Stage: This model considers only the current in the H winding to calculate the actual loading. The rated value of this current is compared 12-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Parameters to Configure to the measured value to derive a Per Unit (p.u.) value. The rated current on the top cooling mode can be found on the transformer’s nameplate. This value is configurable from 1 to 5,000 A. Before configuration, a default value of 250 A is shown. Load Losses on Top Cooling Stage: This value is needed to calculate the temperature drop between the measured top oil temperature and the calculated bottom oil temperature. It can be configured from 10 to 10,000 kW with a default value of 500 kW. No Load Losses at Rated Voltage: This value is needed to calculate the temperature drop between the measured top oil temperature and the calculated bottom oil temperature. It can be configured from 2 to 2,000 kW with a default value of 100 kW. Rated Power at Cooling Stage 0: The cooling stage 0 is defined as the lowest cooling stage that can be used on a transformer. It can be the ONAN mode, or OFAN if there are some oil pumps. Stages 1 and 2 are under the control of the cooling system control but stage 0 is not under this control. Some transformers have only one cooling stage (typically GSU with OFWF cooling mode); in this case the rated power is to be configured as cooling stage 0. The rated power under cooling stage 0 can be found on the transformer’s nameplate. It can be configured from 1 to 600 MVA with a default value of 100 MVA. Rated Power at Cooling Stage 1: In general, cooling stage 1 can be initiated by activating either cooling bank 1 or 2. It is therefore necessary to distinguish between cooling bank and cooling stage. The rated power under cooling stage 1 is to be found on the transformer’s nameplate. It can be configured from 1 to 800 MVA with a default value of 150 MVA. Some transformers have only one cooling bank that can be controlled; in this case, the two rated values indicated on the nameplate are to be configured as cooling stages 0 and 1. Rated Power at Cooling Stage 2: The cooling stage 2 is available when both cooling banks are in service. The rated power at cooling stage 2 can be found on the transformer’s nameplate. It can be configured from 1 to 1,000 MVA with a default value of 200 MVA. Type of Cooling for Stage 0, Type of Cooling for Stage 1 and Type of Cooling for Stage 2: Select in the menu the standard type of cooling that is applicable for cooling stage 0, 1 or 2. Oil Exponent at Cooling Stage 0, Oil Exponent at Cooling Stage 1 and Oil Exponent at Cooling Stage 2: The oil exponent is a parameter defining the relation between the load and the top oil temperature rise. This value is configurable from 0.5 to 1.0 with a default value of 0.8. The best method to establish this value is to run several temperature rise tests as described in IEEE C57.119 - Recommended Practices for Performing Temperature Rise Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 12-3 Chapter 12 • Cooling Efficiency Model Tests on Oil-Immersed Power Transformers at Loads Beyond Nameplate Rating. Otherwise, the following approximate oil exponent values related to the cooling mode of each cooling stage can be used: • 0.8 for the ONAN cooling mode • 0.9 for the ONAF, OFAN, OFAF and OFWF cooling modes • 1.0 for the ODAN, ODAF and ODWF cooling modes Rated Top Oil Rise at Cooling Stage 0, Rated Top Oil Rise at Cooling Stage 1 and Rated Top Oil Rise at Cooling Stage 2: This is the top oil temperature rise over the ambient temperature, when the transformer is loaded at the rated load applicable to cooling stage 0. This value can be found on the transformer’s temperature rise test report if such test has been done on cooling stage 0. If not, the value can be obtained from the manufacturer or estimated from similar transformers. This value is configurable from 20 to 80 °C with a default value of 55 °C. Rated Top Oil Time Constant: The thermal time constant of the top oil is needed to calculate the effect of a load change on the oil temperature change. This time constant can be derived from the temperature rise test report or it can be calculated from the weight of the core, windings and oil as recommended in IEEE C57.91 - 1995. This value is configurable from 0.5 to 8 hours with a default value of 3 hours. Cooling Efficiency Averaging Period: The cooling efficiency is computed from the difference between the calculated and measured top oil temperature values. To avoid false alarms due to sudden variations of ambient or load conditions, the difference is averaged over a period of time. This averaging period can be configured from 60 to 2,680 minutes with a default value of 1,440 minutes. Altitude of the Transformer: As the altitude increases, the air density reduces and cooling is less efficient. The altitude value allows the Device to calculate a reduced value of the rated current that will produce the same top oil temperature rise. The correction factor varies with the type of cooling, in line with IEEE C57.91 - 1995. The altitude value is configurable from 0 to 5,000 meters with a default value of 500 meters. 12.3 MODEL OUTPUTS • Calculated Top Oil Temperature • Calculated Top Oil Difference 12-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Associated Alarms • Calculated Bottom Oil Temperature (if the bottom oil temperature is not available as an input) • Cooling Efficiency Index 12.4 ASSOCIATED ALARMS Cooling Efficiency Index Hi Alarm: This alarm indicates that the transformer is operating at a higher temperature than it should, considering the recent load and recent ambient conditions. It does not represent an immediate threat for transformer life duration. It indicates that the cooling system is not performing as it should and could mean excessive temperature rises in the transformer if it is requested to operate at a full load or under overload conditions. The set point for this alarm is configurable from 0 to 50 °C with a default value of 10 °C. Note: Appendix E presents the list of all alarm messages that can appear on the Multi Host software. 12.5 MAIN WINDOW The main window for the Cooling Efficiency model is shown in Figure 12-2 on page 12-6. The commands applying to all monitoring models are explained in Chapter 5. By default, the following five analog and two digital signals are displayed: • • • • • • • Top Oil Temperature Ambient Temperature Calculated Top Oil Temperature Cooling Efficiency Index Highest Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Cooling Bank 1 Status Cooling Bank 2 Status Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 12-5 Chapter 12 • Cooling Efficiency Model Figure 12-2 - Main Window for the Cooling Efficiency Model 12-6 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Chapter 13 Cooling Control Model The transformer manufacturer usually provides a control system that offers several basic features that are not duplicated by this model and need to be maintained: • Individual thermal protection on each motor • Electrical protection as specified by local electrical code • Manual interruption of power to allow for maintenance activity (removal and replacement of a fan) • Temporization system to avoid the starting of two cooling banks simultaneously, especially if the Device monitoring system experiences a power failure However, taking advantage of a monitoring system to improve the performance of the cooling system extends the useful life of the transformer while reducing maintenance costs. Beyond the basic features provided by the transformer manufacturer control system, this model provides the following functions: • Beside input from top oil and winding temperature, it is now possible to link cooler initiation to the load current, thus providing an earlier start when a sudden overload occurs. • The transformer rating can be adjusted to the ambient temperature to have a more consistent cooler operation. For example, in winter, cooling stages 1 and 2 start at a higher current. • The transformer rating can also be adjusted to the altitude. At higher altitude, the rated current is reduced to account for reduced air density, therefore the cooling system should be started at lower load current. • For transformers with two cooling banks, a duty-sharing function can be initiated. Many users prefer to alternate the usage of cooling banks to equalize the wear on bearings and extend the period between fan motor maintenance. • The cumulative operating time is computed for each cooling bank. • A temporization function is included to avoid the two cooling banks from starting at the same time. • The current drawn by the two cooling banks is monitored with two dedicated analog inputs. These values can be used to detect cooling bank status if no digital input is available for this purpose. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 13-1 Chapter 13 • Cooling Control Model • A cooler exercising routine can be used to run the units for a few minutes every week. • Continuous measurement of cooling bank current is also used to detect malfunction when the current is significantly below or significantly above the rated values. • A cooling discrepancy function will raise an alarm whenever the cooling status of one cooling bank is not reflecting the cooling control instruction that was issued. The Cooling Control model is intended for transformers that have two or three ratings related to specific cooling modes. The lowest rating is defined as “cooling stage 0”, and it usually applies to the natural cooling of the transformer tank without any fan or pump. In other words, this mode is not controlled by the cooling control system. Some transformers (such as indoor generating units) have only one cooling mode, so that whenever the transformer is energized, the full cooling is automatically initiated. These units are treated as having only cooling stage 0, and several of the control features described below are not applicable. The sensors, rules and outputs of the Cooling Control model are illustrated in Figure 13-1 on page 13-2. Note: More technical information is available in Section C.3.10 on page C-50. Figure 13-1 - Summary of the Cooling Control Model 13-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Model Inputs 13.1 MODEL INPUTS Analog inputs: • • • • • • Top oil temperature Load current on winding H Load current on winding X (optional) Load current on winding Y (optional) Current sensor for current in cooling bank 1 (optional) Current sensor for current in cooling bank 2 (optional) Digital inputs: • On/Off status of cooling bank 1 • On/Off status of cooling bank 2 • On/Off status of transformer (energized or de-energized) (optional) 13.2 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • PARAMETERS TO CONFIGURE Rated current in winding H (on top cooling mode) Rated current in winding X (on top cooling mode) Rated current in winding Y (on top cooling mode) Rated current in cooling bank 1 Rated current in cooling bank 2 (if applicable) Top oil temperature set point for stage 1 cooling mode Top oil temperature set point for stage 2 cooling mode (if applicable) Hot-spot temperature set point for stage 1 cooling mode Hot-spot temperature set point for stage 2 cooling mode (if applicable) Load current set-point (in P.U.) for stage 1 cooling mode Load current set-point (in P.U.) for stage 2 cooling mode (if applicable) Deadband for top oil temperature set point Deadband for hot-spot temperature set point Deadband for load current set point Factor K1 to detect that cooling bank 1 or 2 is On Factor K2 to detect that cooling bank 1 or 2 is partly inoperative Factor K3 to detect that cooling bank 1 or 2 is developing a gripping bearing problem Duty sharing factor for cooling bank 1 Ambient temperature Altitude Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 13-3 Chapter 13 • Cooling Control Model 13.3 MODEL PROCESSING Cooling Stage Control: The cooling system is controlled based on values of top oil temperature, hot-spot temperature and load current. At each increment of calculation time, the Device compares these measured or calculated values with configured set points and the deadband to initiate or interrupt cooling mode 2 or 3 as required. Correction of Rated Current for Ambient Temperature: For the purpose of cooling control, the rated current is corrected to account for ambient temperature. This correction is applied as recommended in IEEE C57.91 - 1995 Clause 6.4. In winter, this correction increases the rated load of the transformer, thus delaying the initiation of the cooling system. In summer, the cooling system is initiated at a reduced load current. This correction factor is disabled if the ambient temperature is not available. Correction of Rated Current for Altitude: As the altitude increases, air density decreases, and cooling is less efficient. Accordingly, for cooling control purposes, is it suitable to reduce the rated currents for initiating cooling stages 2 and 3 to lower load current values. The correction factor varies with the type of cooling, in line with IEEE C57.91 - 1995. Cooling Bank Availability: Sometimes, a cooling bank may be removed from service for a long time. To avoid a persistent alarm condition, the user should change the availability of each cooling bank using the appropriate configuration field. Cooling Bank Cumulative Operating Time: The cumulative operating time is computed for each cooling bank and for the cooling stage 0 condition. Cooling Bank Sharing of Duty: When cooling stage 1 is requested to be activated, the system has to choose between starting cooling bank 1 or 2. From the Configuration menu, the user designates the part of cooling duty that is to be carried by cooling bank 1. Cooling bank 2 carries the remainder. If cooling bank 1 is unavailable, cooling bank 2 automatically carries the duty. Cooling stage 2 implies that both cooling bank 1 and 2 fans are activated. Fail-Safe Cooling Control: In the case of a power failure for the monitoring system, all cooling banks are initiated and remain in service until taken over by manual control. This is done by using the NC (normally closed) contact to feed the signal to the cooling control panel of the transformer. Time Delay in Starting of Cooling Banks: Simultaneous starting of cooling banks 1 and 2 should be avoided to prevent tripping of overcurrent protection in the auxiliary control 13-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Main Window system. With some operating conditions, such as energization under full load, the cooling control system could order simultaneous starting of both cooling banks. A temporization circuit of 15 seconds is present in the control circuit of cooling bank 2. In the case of a loss of power for the Device, temporization is provided by the transformer’s manufacturer system. Cooling Bank Status: The digital indication of cooling bank status is to be used as a prime source of information. However, cooling bank current can be used if no digital information is available. Two analog inputs are available to measure the current drawn by each cooling bank. Cooling banks 1 and 2 are considered On if the current exceeds a configurable fraction of the cooling bank rated current. Monitoring of cooling bank status is implemented only after three minutes of initiation for each cooling bank, to allow for sequential starting of each fan or pump. Detection of Cooling Bank Deficiency: If the magnitude of a cooling bank current falls below a preset value, this indicates that part of the cooling bank is inoperative; this warning may be triggered if one or two fans are removed from service for maintenance; this control function is not intended to replace the individual thermal protection provided by the transformer manufacturer. If the magnitude of a cooling bank current increases above a preset value, this indicates that some bearing is starting to grip; the main protection against bearing gripping comes from the individual thermal protection provided by the transformer manufacturer, and the Device function is intended as a back-up warning only. For cooling deficiency functions, two configurable thresholds are provided. It must be kept in mind that these cooling systems are often provided with a time delay between the energization of each fan or pump; therefore the bank current is not monitored until all cooling equipment has been initiated. Cooling Discrepancy: Comparing the cooling control and the cooling status of each bank allows detection of cooling system malfunction. Monitoring of cooling bank status is implemented only after three minutes of initiation for each cooling bank, to allow for the sequential start of each fan or pump. If the transformer has only one cooling mode, the cooling discrepancy function raises an alarm if the unit is energized and the cooling system is not On. 13.4 MAIN WINDOW The main window for this model is shown in Figure 13-2 on page 13-6. The commands applying to all monitoring models are explained in Chapter 5. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 13-5 Chapter 13 • Cooling Control Model Figure 13-2 - Main Window for the Cooling Control Model 13-6 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Chapter 14 OLTC Tap Position Model Tap changer driving mechanisms are always provided with a visual tap position indicator and a counter indicating the total number of operations. This model provides additional information that is useful to monitor the proper operation of this critical unit, such as: • • • • • The cumulative number of operations at each tap since commissioning Resettable variables for operation and maintenance counts Warnings for excessive number of operations over a certain period The time spent since the last operation of the reversing switch A warning to avoid contact cooking because of insufficient operation A position transducer, driven by the visual indicator shaft (also called Geneva shaft), provides a 4–20 mA signal that is proportional to the tap changer mechanical position. The multi position switch can be equipped with jumpers (instead of resistors) in the “through positions” where the tap position indicator stays only momentarily during operation of the reversing switch. In this case, the potentiometer provides an indication of the electric position of the tap changer. When the tap changer operates, the signal should remain steady, until it changes to a new value without falling to zero. It is assumed that the Geneva shaft rotates by a fixed value for each step on the transducer. The signal from the Geneva shaft position transducer is read at regular intervals and is analyzed to determine the actual position of the visual position indicator. The position generated may refer to the mechanical position of the Geneva gear or the electrical position. In the first case, the mechanical position is converted into the electrical position considering the number of through positions specific to this tap changer when it moves to the neutral position. The number of operations on each tap position is presented by histograms using the tap position denomination configured. The system provides three separate registers to record the number of operations carried out by the tap changer: • The Permanent Tap Position Transition Count is intended to sum all operations since the commissioning of the system. However, if the monitoring system is moved to a different Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 14-1 Chapter 14 • OLTC Tap Position Model transformer, the System Administrator can reset this value to zero. This counter provides the number of operations on each tap position, the total number of operations, and the date when the system was put in service. The total number of operations performed prior to the commissioning of the system can also be taken into account. • The Operator Tap Position Transition Count can be reset by the Operator when there is a need to check the number of operations in one day, or several days, in order to demonstrate that the tap changer control unit is operating properly. This counter provides the number of operations on each tap position, the maximum and minimum positions visited by the tap changer since the last reset, and the date of the last reset. • The Maintenance Tap Position Transition Count is used by maintenance personnel to assess the need for maintenance and to plan maintenance schedules. It is typically reset every three or four years when an inspection activity is performed on the unit. This counter provides the number of operations on each tap position, the maximum and minimum positions visited by the tap changer since the last reset, and the date of the last reset. The sensors, rules and outputs of the On-Load Tap Changer (OLTC) Tap Position model are illustrated in Figure 14-1 on page 14-2. Figure 14-1 - Summary of the OLTC Tap Position Model 14.1 MODEL INPUTS • Tap position 14-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Parameters to Configure 14.2 PARAMETERS TO CONFIGURE Total Number of Positions on the Tap Changer: The total number of mechanical positions that are used by the tap changer. This value comprises the total number of electrical tap positions plus the through positions. This value is configurable from 1 to 35 with a default value of 19. Middle Position: Indicates the tap position that provides the rated voltage at mid tap. Through Positions: In order to convert the mechanical position of the driving mechanism to the electrical position of the tap changer, the number of through positions is needed. These are the intermediate positions that take place when the tap changer goes through the neutral position. Information is available in the tap changer operation manual. If the position transducer is equipped with jumpers (instead of resistors) in the through position, enter 0 in this field. Tap Position Polarity: This information defines the type of display used in the OLTC Tap Position model window. This value is to be selected from Table 14-1 on page 14-3 illustrating a tap changer with 17 electrical positions. Table 14-1 - Lowest, Middle and Maximum Taps Lowest Tap Middle Tap Maximum Tap Absolute 1 9 17 Absolute Reverse 17 9 1 Bipolar L8 0 R8 Bipolar Reverse R8 0 L8 Tap Position Units (-/+): This value complements the preceding one by indicating whether the signs “-” and “+” or the symbols “L” and “R” are to be used. For “Bipolar” and “Bipolar Reverse,” the units can be set to any character, the first character designating the left side, and the second character the second side. Real Tap Position Count Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 14-3 Chapter 14 • OLTC Tap Position Model Actual Tap Position: The number of positions that the tap changer can take. The value can be found on the tap changer nameplate. This value can be configured from 3 to 35 with a default value of 17. Number of Operations Since Last Maintenance Setpoint: The number of operations that is deemed acceptable between two successive maintenance operations. This value can be configured from 10,000 to 200,000 operations with a default value of 30,000. Elapsed Time Since Last Maintenance Setpoint: The maximum time duration that is allowed between successive maintenance operations. This value can be configured from 1 to 10 years with a default value of 5 years. Days Elapsed Since Last Reversing Switch Operation Setpoint: Tap changers should not be left on the same position of the reversing switch for an excessive length of time. Contacts that are not being operated tend to overheat and develop carbon that collects around the contact. Manufacturers normally recommend that this contact be operated at least once a year. This value is configurable from 100 to 1,000 days with a default value of 365 days. Maximum Number of Tap Operations per Hour Setpoint: An abnormal network condition or an unsuitable setting of the tap changer control system can lead to an excessive number of operations that will wear unduly the tap changer. The value for the maximum number of operations per hour can be configured from 5 to 100 operations with a default value of 10. Maximum Number of Tap Operations per Day Setpoint: An abnormal network condition or an unsuitable setting of the tap changer control system can lead to an excessive number of operations that will wear unduly the tap changer. The value for the maximum number of operation per day can be configured from 20 to 1,000 operations with a default value of 100. 14.3 • • • • • • • • MODEL OUTPUTS Actual Tap Position Elapsed Time Since Last Maintenance Reset Elapsed Days Since Last Reversing Switch Operation Last Hour Operation Count Last Day Operation Count Last Permanent Tap Position Reset Time Stamp Permanent Tap Position Transition Count Permanent Count for Positions 1-35 14-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Associated Alarms • Last Operator Tap Position Reset Time Stamp • Operator Tap Position Transition Count: – Historic Min for Tap Position – Historic Min Timestamp for Tap Position – Historic Max for Tap Position – Historic Max Timestamp for Tap Position • Resettable Count for Positions 1-35 • Last Maintenance Tap Position Reset Time Stamp • Maintenance Tap Position Transition Count: – Historic Min for Maintenance Tap Position – Historic Min Timestamp for Maintenance Tap Position – Historic Max for Maintenance Tap Position – Historic Max Timestamp for Maintenance Tap Position • Maintenance Count for Positions 1-35 Note: When viewed in historic mode, the OLTC Tap Position model only displays the tap positions that had been viewed the last time in real time. 14.4 ASSOCIATED ALARMS Number of Operations Since Last Maintenance: This alarm indicates that the number of operations since the last maintenance has exceeded the set point. Elapsed Time Since Last Maintenance: This alarm indicates that the time elapsed since the last maintenance has exceeded the set point. Days Elapsed Since Last Reversing Switch Operation: This alarm indicates that the time elapsed since the last operation of the reversing switch has exceeded the set point. Maximum Number of Tap Operations per Hour: This alarm indicates that the number of operations per hour has exceeded the set point. Maximum Number of Tap Operations per Day: This alarm indicates that the number of operations per day has exceeded the set point. Note: Appendix E presents the list of all alarm messages that can appear on the Multi Host software. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 14-5 Chapter 14 • OLTC Tap Position Model 14.5 MAIN WINDOW The main window for the OLTC Tap Position model is shown in Figure 14-2 on page 14-6. Figure 14-2 - Main Window for the OLTC Tap Position Model • On the left side, a table shows the count of permanent positions, resettable positions and maintenance positions. • On the right side, the same data is displayed graphically. • Each graph has a Reset button associated to it. However, the permanent position’s Reset button, used to reset all the fields, is protected by the level-3 password (refer to Section 2.2 on page 2-2). • On the top, other information relative to the OLTC tap position is displayed. 14-6 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Chapter 15 OLTC Temperature Differential Model Note: This model is specific to the Intellix MO150. The On-Load Tap Changer (OLTC) Temperature Differential model continuously compares the top oil temperature in the main tank with the tap changer compartment temperature. Monitoring of the tap changer temperature is a recognized method of detecting abnormal operating conditions in the tap changer. This monitoring method is intended for tap changers mounted on a separate compartment on the transformer tank. The tap changer temperature is normally lower than the main tank temperature because no heat source is expected in the tap changer. If the tap changer temperature rises above the main tank temperature, it is indicative of an overheating contact. The temperature difference is calculated by subtracting the tap changer temperature minus the main tank temperature, thus yielding a negative value. This method allows to set the alarm on a positive threshold value rather than a negative value. This temperature difference is averaged with a low-pass filter to eliminate normal variations arising from sunshine and wind. A short-term averaged value is generated with a configurable filtering factor typically set at 60 minutes. This short-term average is intended to detect severe heat sources such as resistor overheating when the mechanical links break while the switches are between two contacts. A long-term averaged value is generated with a configurable filtering factor typically set at 7 days. This long-term average is intended to detect slow-evolving thermal problems such as contact overheating. The measured temperature difference is averaged over a round number of days to filter out the daily temperature variations. The sensors, rules and outputs of the OLTC Temperature Differential model are illustrated in Figure 15-1 on page 15-2. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 15-1 Chapter 15 • OLTC Temperature Differential Model Figure 15-1 - Summary of the OLTC Temperature Differential Model 15.1 MODEL INPUTS • Top oil temperature • OLTC main tank temperature 15.2 PARAMETERS TO CONFIGURE Short-Term Filtering Value: The major problems in the tap changer, such as an incomplete operation of the selector switch, are better detected with a short-term filtering. The shortterm filtering value can be configured from 5 to 1,380 minutes with a default value of 60 minutes. Long-Term Filtering Value: The slow-evolving thermal problems such as contact overheating are better detected with a long-term filtering. The long-term filtering value can be configured from 1 to 1,600 hours with a default value of 168 hours. 15.3 MODEL OUTPUTS • OLTC Differential Temperature • Short-Term Average of Tap Changer Temperature Differential • Long-Term Average of Tap Changer Temperature Differential 15-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Associated Alarms 15.4 ASSOCIATED ALARMS OLTC Short-Term Temperature Differential Hi Alarm: A tap changer running 5 °C above the main tank temperature should be closely monitored. This value is configurable from 0 to 30 °C. OLTC Short-Term Temperature Differential Hi-Hi Alarm: A tap changer running 15 °C above the main tank temperature is a serious concern. This value is configurable from 0 to 40 °C. OLTC Long-Term Temperature Differential Hi Alarm: A tap changer running continuously 3 °C above the main tank temperature should be closely monitored. This value is configurable from 0 to 20 °C. OLTC Long-Term Temperature Differential Hi-Hi Alarm: A tap changer running continuously 10 °C above the main tank temperature is a serious concern. This value is configurable from 0 to 30 °C. Note: Appendix E presents the list of all alarm messages that can appear on the Multi Host software. 15.5 MAIN WINDOW The main window for the OLTC Temperature Differential model is shown in Figure 15-2 on page 15-4. The commands applying to all monitoring models are explained in Chapter 5. By default, the following five analog signals are displayed: • • • • • Top Oil Temperature OLTC Tank Temperature OLTC Temperature Differential Short-Term Average of Tap Changer Temperature Long-Term Average of Tap Changer Temperature Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 15-3 Chapter 15 • OLTC Temperature Differential Model Figure 15-2 - Main Window for the OLTC Temperature Differential Model 15-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Chapter 16 Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommendations Module The scope of the Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommendations (DPR) module is to provide information and advices for each alarm condition that can be triggered in the Hydran M2 With Models and Intellix MO150 Devices. Some of the alarms must be analyzed in conjunction with other parameters in order to generate more specific advice. These advices indicate immediate actions to the operator upon an alarm occurrence. It is not intended to guide the actions of the maintenance personnel, since they have access to additional information allowing a more complete condition assessment. The DPR module is available inside the Multi Host software application as a help tool attached to the Alarm Management functionality for the Hydran M2 With Models and Intellix MO150 Devices. It is not available on the Devices’ local display and does not involve any firmware computation. Some alarm conditions trigger verification of additional conditions before a diagnostic is issued. These extra verifications apply to the following alarms: • • • • Top Oil Temperature Hi Alarm Top Oil Temperature Hi-Hi Alarm Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Hi Alarm Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Hi-Hi Alarm The additional verification conditions are: • Top cooling mode not in service: Means the digital inputs for cooling stage 1 or 2 are configured and not connected (status is “Off”). • Load above rated value: Means the Load Factor calculated as a ratio of the load current sensors values (H, X, Y, C) and the rated current winding (H, X, Y) exceeds 1 p.u. • Ambient temperature above 30 °C: Means the ambient temperature reading from the sensor connected to the Device exceeds 30 °C. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 16-1 Chapter 16 • Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommendations Module 16.1 ACTIVATION CRITERIA The following criteria must be met in order to activate the DPR module: • With a Hydran M2 With Models Device: The DPR module is accessible inside the Multi Host software application connecting to the Hydran M2 With Models if at least one model is activated (model activation key required) and enabled (the corresponding sensors in Table 4-1 on page 4-2 are connected). • With an Intellix MO150 Device: The DPR module is accessible automatically inside the Multi Host software application connecting to the Intellix MO150. • The DPR module is accessible only in real-time (on-line) connection. This feature is not applicable when a Device is off-line or when the Multi Host software application is in off-line mode (see Section 2.4 on page 2-12). • The DPR module is accessible only if active alarms are present (the alarm status is On or the acknowledge status is Pending; see Table 16-1 on page 16-2) in the Device and displayed in the Multi Host software application. Table 16-1 - Availability of DPR for Active Alarms Alarm Status Acknowledge Status Display DPR On Pending YES On Acknowledged YES Off Pending YES Off Acknowledged No To access the DPR module, two methods are available: • Via the Alarms window in real-time mode: See Section 16.2 on page 16-3. • Via the Network View window: See Section 16.3 on page 16-5. 16-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Access via the Alarms Window 16.2 ACCESS VIA THE ALARMS WINDOW In the View menu, select Real Time and then Alarms, as explained in Section 3.3.2.3 on page 3-18. The Alarms window shown in Figure 16-1 on page 16-3 displays a complete list of the enabled alarms along with their acknowledgement status. Figure 16-1 - Alarms Window • An entire row having a red background indicates the alarm is still active. • A question mark in a circle at the left end in the Name column indicates the Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommendations advices are available for this active alarm. • For any active alarm, double-click the alarm name or right-click anywhere in the row. The appropriate Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommended Action box appears (see an example in Figure 16-2 on page 16-4). Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 16-3 Chapter 16 • Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommendations Module Figure 16-2 - Typical Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommended Action Box 16-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Access via the Network View Window This box displays the following information: • Alarm Condition: The alarm condition description, same as displayed in the Name column in the Alarms window (Figure 16-1 on page 16-3). • Diagnostic: The identification of the alarm condition with an explanation on what this alarm is about and what it tells about the condition of the transformer at this moment. In some cases the alarm condition is combined with other parameters available in the monitoring system to generate a more specific diagnostic. • Prognostic: A set of statements that warn the operator about the possible consequences for the transformer if the situation is allowed to continue without any remedial action being taken. • Recommended Action: Summarizes the verifications that should be carried out immediately, data that should be collected to facilitate further actions, and specific actions that should be considered to improve the current situation. The entire information for the 88 alarm conditions that can be displayed in the DPR module can be found in Appendix B. 16.3 ACCESS VIA THE NETWORK VIEW WINDOW In the View menu, select Network View, as explained in Section 3.3.1 on page 3-6. In the Network View window (see Figure 3-8 on page 3-8 for a Hydran M2 or Figure 3-9 on page 3-9 for an Intellix MO150), click View Active Alarms. The Active Alarms box shown in Figure 16-3 on page 16-5 displays a complete list of the active alarms along with their acknowledgement status. Figure 16-3 - Active Alarms Box • A question mark in a circle at the left end in the Name column indicates the Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommendations advices are available for this active alarm. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 16-5 Chapter 16 • Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommendations Module • Double-click the alarm name or right-click anywhere in the row. The appropriate Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommended Action box appears (see an example in Figure 16-2 on page 16-4). 16-6 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Chapter 17 Troubleshooting This Chapter describes several troubleshooting instructions, both for hardware and software, that can be performed when the Hydran M2 or the Intellix MO150 sends alarm messages to the control room or begins to show abnormal behavior. 17.1 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MULTI HOST SOFTWARE AND A DEVICE CANNOT BE ESTABLISHED 17.1.1 Time-out If the Multi Host software returns the message Timeout occured for communication request shown in Figure 17-1 on page 17-1 when connecting to a power station, verify the following settings: 1. For the RS-232 connection type: Verify the Baud Rate corresponds to the baud rate set in the Device. Figure 17-1 - Timeout Occured Box 2. Verify the DNP3 Address corresponds to the address set in the Device. 3. Verify the Ethernet card is properly configured. Note: It is also applicable with a fiber optic converter. 4. Verify the modem card is properly configured. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 17-1 Chapter 17 • Troubleshooting 5. For connections with the ModBus Ascii or ModBus RTU protocol: Verify the data bits, the parity and the stop bits correspond to the settings in the Device. 6. For connections with the ModBus RTU protocol: Set the data bits ONLY to 8 bits. 17.1.2 Connection Open If the Multi Host software returns the message Connection open failed shown in Figure 17-2 on page 17-2 when connecting to a power station, verify the following settings: 1. Verify the selected communication protocol (DNP3, ModBus Ascii, Modbus RTU or ModBus TCP/IP) corresponds to the connection method set in the Device. Figure 17-2 - Connection Open Failed Box 2. Verify the connection type is set properly. The Hydran Controller connection type must be chosen for connections to a Hydran 201Ci-C or a Hydran 201Ci-1 using an RS-232 cable. 3. For the RS-232 connection type: Verify the selected COM port corresponds to the COM port that the RS-232 cable is connected to. 4. For the TCP/IP connection type: Verify the port is configured properly and corresponds to the port set on the Ethernet card. The default port is 5000. Note: It is also applicable with a fiber optic converter. 5. Verify the cable used for communication is the correct type of cable and it is connected properly. • For the RS-232 connection type: Verify the cable is Null Modem. 17-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Communication Between the Multi Host Software and a Device Cannot Be • For the TCP/IP connection type: Try to ping the Device as follows: – Open the Command Prompt. – Type “Ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX” where XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX is the IP address of the Device. – The Device should reply four times. – Close the Command Prompt. 17.1.3 Wrong Device ID If at least one of the Power Station ID’s or Device ID’s does not correspond with the values saved in the Device, when the user tries to connect on-line to the Device, the Power Station ID and Device ID Do Not Correspond warning message box shown in Figure 2-13 on page 2-15 appears and the connection to the Device stops. Note: Connecting when the ID’s do not match is possible but not recommended as the historic records might become unusable. Verify the following settings: 1. Verify the Power Station ID field corresponds to the Power Station ID configured in the Device. 2. Verify the Device ID field corresponds to the Device ID configured in the Device. Note: The pair of Power Station ID and Device ID must be unique for each Device. 17.1.4 Wrong Device Type If the Multi Host software returns the message Connect Appropriate Device shown in Figure 17-3 on page 17-4 when connecting to a power station, verify that the selected Device in the field Device Type corresponds to the Device that is being connected. If not, select the appropriate Device Type. 17.1.5 Unable to Connect to All Devices If the Multi Host software is unable to connect to all Devices when connecting to a power station with multiple Devices, verify the following items: 1. All Devices must be powered up. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 17-3 Chapter 17 • Troubleshooting Figure 17-3 - Connect Appropriate Device Box 2. All Devices must be connected with RS-485 twisted-pair cables. Refer to the Hydran M2 Instruction Manual or the Intellix MO150 Instruction Manual for details. 3. The first Device must have the bridge enabled: • For the DNP3 protocol: Use the Comm Setup menu to set the Bridged protocol to DNP3, the RS-485 protocol to Bridged, and the RS-232, Ethernet or Modem protocol (depending on which one is used) to Bridged. • For the Modbus protocol: Set Modbus 485 Bridge to Enabled. 4. All other Devices must have the RS-485 configured to the same communication protocol and speed as the first Device. 5. Verify all Devices have different DNP3 addresses and Device ID’s, and they match the settings in the Multi Host software. 17.2 HISTORY DOWNLOAD PROBLEMS 17.2.1 File Busy When downloading history, the message File Busy appears and the history download gets interrupted. This is caused by several users connecting to the same Device and trying to download history simultaneously. When this happens, wait until the download is finished on the other Multi Host software and restart the download on the local PC. 17.2.2 History Not Available When trying to display historic values in View > Real time > History or View > Models, the Multi Host software downloads the history but displays the message History not 17-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 History Download Problems available. When this happens, select a different time range or a different range when history is available and try again. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 17-5 Chapter 17 • Troubleshooting PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 17-6 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Appendix A Software License for the Multi Host Software Attention: In order to access the Multi Host software, you must agree to be bound by the terms of this Software End User License Agreement: The Multi Host software is subject to the General Electric Canada Software End User License Agreement and is otherwise protected by copyright law and international treaties. Any unauthorized use, reproduction or distribution of this computer program, or any portion of it, is not permitted and may result in civil and criminal penalties. This program is proprietary to General Electric Canada and its copyright rights in this program shall be enforced. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, sell, distribute, or commercially exploit this software. You should treat this software just like any other copyrighted material. General Electric Canada authorizes you to make archive copies of this software for the purposes of backing up your software and protecting your investment from loss, and to make additional copies for use within your company or facilities. This software is licensed for use only with the Hydran M2 or the Intellix MO150. The information contained in the program documentation is the sole property of General Electric Canada. This program documentation cannot, in whole or in part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, altered, translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machinereadable form by any means without the prior written consent of General Electric Canada. This software and its accompanying materials in printed and/or electronic form may contain reference to, or information about, General Electric Canada products (equipment or programs), that are not now available. Such references or information must not be construed to mean that General Electric Canada intends to provide such products, programming, or services. For more information, please write to [email protected] or visit www.ge.com/energy. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 A-1 Appendix A • Software License for the Multi Host Software * Trademarks or registered trademarks of General Electric Company and/or General Electric Canada. A-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Appendix B Alarm Conditions and Advice This Appendix contains information for the 88 alarm conditions that can be displayed in the Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommendations (DPR) module of the Multi Host software. Table B-1 - Alarm Conditions and Advice No 1 Condition Diagnostic Prognostic The measured level of dissolved gas is currently exceeding the Gas Level Hi setting. HydranLevel The current reading is XXX ppm. Hi The “Gas Hi” alarm is currently set at YYY ppm with a delay of ZZZ minutes. (The factory default is 250 ppm) Part 18415 Recommendations • Take oil sample for full DGA A “Gas High” alarm is analysis. indicative of a fault • Check history of Hydran reading condition that could be and trending. developing in the trans• If single-phase unit, check former. If unattended, the Hydran level on other phases. transformer may develop a • Search for correlation of Hydran “Gas High-High” alarm. reading with load and tap changer position. Rev. 7, December 2010 B-1 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Recommendations 2 • Take oil sample for full DGA analysis. • Increase frequency of DGA The measured level of dissolved analysis. A “Gas High-High” alarm gas is currently exceeding the Gas • Check history of Hydran reading is indicative of a serious Level High-High setting. and trending. fault condition that is Hydran Level The current reading is XXX ppm. • Search for correlation of Hydran apparently developing in Hi-Hi The “Gas Hi-Hi” alarm is currently reading with load and tap the transformer. If set at YYY ppm with a delay of changer position. unattended, the transformer ZZZ minutes. (The factory default • Consider proceeding with a may fail. is 500 ppm) detailed condition assessment to determine whether the transformer should be removed from service. 3 The calculated short-term trend of gas increase is currently exceeding the Hi setting. The Hydran short-term trend is currently XXX ppm over a period Hydran of YYY hours. Hourly Trend The current Hi set point for shortHi term trend is an increase of ZZZ ppm over a period of YYY hours. (The factory default is a gas increase of 10 ppm per period of 24 hours) Part 18415 • Check whether the setting is reasonable. See the Instruction Manual. Although the gas level • Take oil sample for full DGA might still be low, a fault analysis. releasing some gas is • Check history of Hydran reading suspected and closer and trending. monitoring is advisable. If • If single-phase unit, check unattended, the transformer Hydran Hourly Trend on other may develop a “Hydran phases. Hourly Trend Hi-Hi” alarm. • Search for correlation of Hydran Hourly Trend with load and tap changer position. Rev. 7, December 2010 B-2 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Recommendations 4 The calculated short-term trend of gas increase is currently exceeding the Hi-Hi setting. The Hydran short-term trend is currently XXX ppm over a period Hydran of YYY hours. Hourly Trend The current Hi-Hi set point for Hi-Hi short-term trend is an increase of ZZZ ppm over a period of YY hours. (The factory default is a gas increase of 20 ppm per period of 24 hours) • Take oil sample for full DGA analysis. • Increase frequency of DGA The short-term rate of gas analysis. increase is becoming • Check history of Hydran reading alarming. A fault is and trending. probably developing or • Search for correlation of Hydran insulation is undergoing reading with load and tap severe degradation. If changer position. unattended, the transformer • Consider proceeding with a may fail. detailed condition assessment to determine whether the transformer should be removed from service. 5 The calculated long-term trend of gas increase is currently exceeding the Hi setting. The Hydran long-term trend is currently XXX ppm over a period Hydran Daily of YYY hours. Trend Hi The current Hi set point for longterm gas trend is an increase of XX ppm over a period of YY days. (The factory default is a gas increase of 25 ppm per period of 30 days) • Check whether the setting is reasonable. See the Instruction Manual. • Take oil sample for full DGA analysis. • Check history of Hydran reading and trending. • If single-phase unit, check Hydran Hourly Trend on other phases. • Search for correlation of Hydran Hourly Trend with load and tap changer position. Part 18415 Although the gas level might still be low, the longterm rate of gas increase is becoming significant. This is indicative of an incipient fault developing. If unattended, the transformer may develop a “Hydran Daily Trend Hi-Hi” alarm. Rev. 7, December 2010 B-3 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Recommendations 6 The calculated long-term trend of gas increase is currently exceeding the Hi-Hi setting. The Hydran long-term trend is currently XXX ppm over a period Hydran Daily of YYY hours. Trend Hi-Hi The current Hi-Hi set point for long-term trend is an increase of XXX ppm over a period of YY days. (The factory default is a gas increase of 50 ppm per period of 30 days) • Take oil sample for full DGA analysis. • Increase frequency of DGA The long-term rate of gas analysis. increase is becoming • Check history of Hydran reading alarming. A fault is and trending. probably developing or • Search for correlation of Hydran insulation is undergoing reading with load and tap severe degradation. If changer position. unattended, the transformer • Consider proceeding with a may fail. detailed condition assessment to determine whether the transformer should be removed from service. 7 The System Fault Monitor has Hydran detected that the sensor cable is Sensor Cable open thus making the sensor Open inoperative. The Hydran sensor will remain inoperative until the • Repair sensor cable now. sensor cable is restored. 8 The System Fault Monitor has Hydran detected that the sensor cable is Sensor Cable shorted thus making the sensor Short inoperative. The Hydran sensor will remain inoperative until the • Repair sensor cable now. sensor cable is restored. 9 Hydran Replace Sensor Soon Part 18415 The System Fault Monitor indicates that the sensor sensitivity has begun to drop and replacement should be considered within the next few months. If left unattended, the sensor may deteriorate • Contact GE for closer sensor further and the “Hydran assessment. Replace Sensor Now” may be triggered. Rev. 7, December 2010 B-4 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Recommendations Hydran 10 Replace Sensor Now The System Fault Monitor indicates that the sensor sensitivity is substantially reduced and replacement should be provided as soon as possible. Sensor sensitivity is degraded and Hydran reading is less reliable. Sensor may become inoperant or unable to properly monitor the gas level. %RH Level Hi %RH is the relative humidity in oil, as measured by the Hydran M2 moisture sensor. This value is presently above the Hi alarm setting. The actual reading is XX%. The current setting for Hi relative humidity alarm is XX%. (The factory default value is 30%) Moisture promotes insulation aging, limits overload capability and reduces dielectric strength. Higher moisture content is • Check history of %RH Level to be expected when reading and trending. transformer is running warmer but sharp increase in moisture content could be indicative of water ingress. 11 Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 • Contact GE for assistance in sensor replacement. B-5 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice No Diagnostic Prognostic Recommendations %RH Level Hi-Hi %RH is the relative humidity in oil, as measured by the Hydran M2 moisture sensor. This value is presently above the Hi-Hi alarm setting. The actual reading is XX%. The current setting for Hi-Hi alarm on oil relative humidity is XX%. (The factory default value is 50%) Moisture promotes insulation aging, limits overload capability and reduces dielectric strength. Higher moisture content is to be expected when transformer is running warmer but sharp increase in moisture content could be indicative of water ingress. • Check history of %RH Level reading and trending. • Check water-in-oil condensation temperature. • Check for water content in winding insulation and pressboard barriers. • Plan for a detailed condition assessment to determine whether the transformer needs drying. %RH Level 13 Hourly Average Hi The calculated average value of relative humidity in oil is presently above the Hi alarm setting. The current calculated value is XX%, averaged over a period of YY hours The current setting for average %RH Hi alarm is ZZ% averaged over a period of YY hours. (The factory default value is an average %RH of 30% over a 24-hour period) Moisture promotes insulation aging, limits • Check history of %RH Level overload capability and reading and trending. reduces dielectric strength. • Beware of risk of over-saturation Higher moisture content is and water-in-oil precipitation if to be expected when transformer is allowed to cool transformer is running down rapidly. warmer but sharp increase • Check water-in-oil condensation in moisture content could temperature. be indicative of water ingress. 12 Condition Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 B-6 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice No Condition %RH Level Hourly 14 Average HiHi 15 H2O PPM Level Hi Part 18415 Diagnostic Prognostic Recommendations The calculated average value of relative humidity in oil is presently above the Hi-Hi alarm setting. The current calculated value is XX%, averaged over a period of YY hours The current setting for %RH Hi-Hi alarm is ZZ% averaged over a period of YY hours. (The factory default value is an average %RH of 50% over a 24-hour period) Moisture promotes insulation aging, limits overload capability and reduces dielectric strength. Higher moisture content is to be expected when transformer is running warmer but sharp increase in moisture content could be indicative of water ingress. • Check history of %RH Level reading and trending. • Check water-in-oil condensation temperature. • Check for water content in winding insulation and pressboard barriers. • Plan for a detailed condition assessment to determine whether the transformer needs drying. The H2O value is the absolute value of water content in oil expressed in ppm. This value is calculated using the oil saturation curve applicable to the type of oil selected in the Moisture Reading Setup page. The H2O ppm value is currently XX ppm. The Hi setting for H2O ppm is currently YYY ppm. (The factory default value is 25 ppm) Moisture promotes • Check history of %RH Level insulation aging, limits reading and trending. overload capability and • Beware of risk of over-saturation reduces dielectric strength. and water-in-oil precipitation if PPM value is less transformer is allowed to cool dependable than %RH down rapidly. saturation since the oil • Check water-in-oil condensation saturation curve varies with temperature. type of oil and oil aging. Rev. 7, December 2010 B-7 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Recommendations H2O PPM Level Hi-Hi The H2O value is the absolute water content in oil expressed in PPM. This value is calculated using the oil saturation curve applicable to the type of oil selected in the Moisture Reading Setup page. The H2O ppm value is currently XX ppm. The Hi-Hi setting for H2O ppm is currently YYY ppm. (The factory default value is 40 ppm) • Check history of %RH Level Moisture promotes reading and trending. insulation aging, limits • Check water-in-oil condensation overload capability and temperature. reduces dielectric strength. • Check for water content in PPM value is less winding insulation and dependable than %RH pressboard barriers. saturation since the oil • Plan for a detailed condition saturation curve varies with assessment to determine whether type of oil and oil aging. the transformer needs drying. H2O PPM 17 Hourly Average Hi The H2O ppm Hourly Average is the absolute value of water content in oil, expressed in ppm, and averaged over a certain period. This value is calculated using the oil saturation curve assumed for this transformer and is subject to significant error. The value is currently XX ppm, which is above the Hi setting of YY ppm, averaged over ZZZ hours. (The factory default value is 25 ppm averaged over 24 hours) Moisture promotes • Check history of %RH Level insulation aging, limits reading and trending. overload capability and • Beware of risk of over-saturation reduces dielectric strength. and water-in-oil precipitation if PPM value is less transformer is allowed to cool dependable than %RH down rapidly. saturation since the oil • Check water-in-oil condensation saturation curve varies with temperature. type of oil and oil aging. 16 Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 B-8 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Recommendations H2O PPM Hourly 18 Average HiHi The H2O ppm Hourly Average is the absolute value of water content in oil, expressed in ppm, and averaged over a certain period. This value is calculated using the oil saturation curve assumed for this transformer and is subject to significant error. The value is currently XX ppm, which is above the Hi-Hi setting of YY ppm, averaged over ZZZ hours. (The factory default value is 40 ppm averaged over 24 hours) • Check history of %RH Level Moisture promotes reading and trending. insulation aging, limits • Check water-in-oil condensation overload capability and temperature. reduces dielectric strength. • Check for water content in PPM value is less winding insulation and dependable than %RH pressboard barriers. saturation since the oil • Plan for a detailed condition saturation curve varies with assessment to determine whether type of oil and oil aging. the transformer needs drying. Hydran Sensor 19 Temperature Low The System Fault Monitor indicates the temperature of the Hydran sensor is currently low. The sensor temperature is currently XX °C. The sensor Low Temperature setting is currently YY °C. (Factory default value is 15 °C) At the “Low” level, sensitivity of the sensor is not affected. If temperature continues to fall, sensor • Keep an eye on temperature. sensitivity could be • Check the sensor temperature reduced. settings. This condition likely indicates a faulty heating system. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 B-9 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Recommendations Hydran Sensor 20 Temperature Low-Low The System Fault Monitor indicates the temperature of the Hydran sensor is currently very low. The sensor temperature is currently XX °C. The sensor Low-Low Temperature setting is currently YY °C. (Factory default value is 5 °C) At the Low-Low level, sensitivity of the sensor is reduced. This condition likely • Fix the heating system. indicates a faulty heating system. System Fault Relay should be triggered any moment. Hydran Sensor 21 Temperature Hi The System Fault Monitor indicates that the temperature of the Hydran sensor is currently above the Hi Temperature setting. The sensor temperature is currently XX °C. The sensor Hi Temperature setting is currently YY °C. (Factory default value is 65 °C) Sensor is not affected for the time being. But if temperature continues to rise, the sensor could experience a period of accelerated aging. This condition likely indicates a faulty heating system or a very high oil temperature. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 • Keep an eye on temperature. • Check the sensor temperature settings. B-10 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Recommendations Hydran Sensor 22 Temperature Hi-Hi The System Fault Monitor indicates that the temperature of the Hydran sensor is currently very high. The sensor temperature is currently XX °C. The sensor High-High Temperature setting is currently YY °C. (Factory default value is 75 °C) Operation at this high temperature will shorten the sensor life. This condition likely • Review sensor installation. indicates a faulty heating • Consider addition of heat sink on system or a very high oil the sensor housing. temperature. System Fault Relay should be triggered any moment. Base Plate 23 Temperature Low The System Fault Monitor indicates the temperature of the Base Plate is currently low. The Base Plate temperature is currently XX °C. The Base Plate Low Temperature setting is currently YY °C. (Factory default value is 15 °C) At the “Low” level, sensitivity of the sensor is • Keep an eye on Base Plate not affected. If temperature temperature. continues to fall, sensor • Check the Hydran sensor sensitivity could be temperature. reduced. • Check the Base Plate This condition likely temperature settings. indicates a faulty heating system. Base Plate 24 Temperature Low-Low The System Fault Monitor indicates the temperature of the Base Plate is currently very low. The Base Plate temperature is currently XX °C. The Base Plate Low-Low Temperature setting is currently YY °C. (Factory default value is 5 °C) At the Low-Low level, sensitivity of the sensor is reduced. This condition likely • Fix the heating system. indicates a faulty heating system. System Fault Relay should be triggered any moment. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 B-11 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Recommendations Base Plate 25 Temperature Hi The System Fault Monitor indicates that the temperature of the Base Plate is currently above the Hi Temperature setting. The Base Plate temperature is currently XX °C. The Base Plate Hi Temperature setting is currently YY °C. (Factory default value is 65 °C) Sensor is not affected for the time being. But if temperature continues to rise, the sensor could experience a period of accelerated aging. This condition could indicate a faulty heating system or a very high oil temperature. Base Plate 26 Temperature Hi-Hi The System Fault Monitor indicates that the temperature of the Base Plate is currently very high. The Base Plate temperature is currently XX °C. The Base Plate High-High Temperature setting is currently YY °C. (Factory default value is 75 °C) Operation at this high temperature will shorten the sensor life. This condition could • Review sensor installation. indicate a faulty heating • Consider addition of heat sink on system or a very high oil the sensor housing. temperature. System Fault Relay should be triggered any moment. 27 Battery Low The System Fault Monitor indicates that the battery voltage is lower that the Low setting. This setting is currently XX V. (The factory default value for Battery Low Voltage is 2.75 V) No immediate effect is to be expected. • Plan battery replacement within System Fault Relay should next 9 months. be triggered any moment. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 • Keep an eye on Base Plate temperature. • Check the Hydran sensor temperature. • Check the Base Plate temperature settings. B-12 No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic The System Fault Monitor indicates that the battery voltage is lower that the Low-Low setting. Battery Low28 This setting is currently XX V. Low (The factory default value for Battery Low-Low Voltage is 2.45 V) Recommendations If battery is allowed to reach exhaustion configuration data and historic data • Plan battery replacement within could be lost. next 3 months. System Fault Relay should be triggered any moment. Top Oil 29 Temperature Hi Excessive top oil temperature could be due to The transformer oil is currently operating conditions or operating at a temperature above deficiency of the cooling the first level of alarm setting. system. If this condition is The top oil temperature is currently maintained for several XX °C. weeks, it could result in The Top Oil Hi alarm setting is accelerated oil aging. currently YY °C. (The factory Winding Hot-Spot default value is 85 °C) Temperature alarm is to be expected soon. • Make sure cooling system is fully operational. • Check top-oil alarm setting. • Check ambient temperature. • Check Winding Hot-Spot temperature. • If single-phase unit, check top oil temperature on other phases. • Evaluate acceptable load in regard to ambient temperature. • Consider reducing load. Top-Oil Temperature Hi 30 and Top cooling mode not in service The transformer oil is currently operating at a temperature above the first level of alarm setting. This is apparently caused by a deficiency in the Cooling system. The top oil temperature is currently XX °C. The Top Oil Hi alarm setting is currently YY °C. (The factory default value is 85 °C) • Check Cooling Control conditions and settings. • Check power supply on top cooling mode. • Check for impairment of top cooling mode. • Check top-oil alarm setting. • Check winding hot-spot temperature. • Consider reducing load. Part 18415 Part of the cooling being inoperative, the transformer oil temperature will rise above normal values. If this condition is maintained for several weeks, it could result in accelerated oil aging. Rev. 7, December 2010 B-13 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Recommendations Top-Oil Temperature Hi 31 and Load above rated value The transformer oil is currently operating at a temperature above the first level of alarm setting. This is apparently caused by the high load currently applied. The top oil temperature is currently XX °C. The Top Oil Hi alarm setting is currently YY °C. (The factory default value is 85 °C) If this condition is maintained for several weeks, it could result in accelerated oil aging. • Make sure cooling system is fully operational. • Check ambient temperature. • Evaluate acceptable load in regard to ambient temperature. • Check winding hot-spot temperature alarm setting and measured value. • Consider reducing load. Top-Oil Temperature Hi 32 and Ambient temperature above 30 °C The transformer oil is currently operating at a temperature above the first level of alarm setting. This is apparently caused by the high ambient temperature. The top oil temperature is currently XX °C. The Top Oil Hi alarm setting is currently YY °C. (The factory default value is 85 °C) If this condition is maintained for several weeks, it could result in accelerated oil aging. • Make sure cooling system is fully operational. • Evaluate top oil temperature in regard to ambient temperature. • Consider reducing load. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 B-14 No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Top-Oil 33 Temperature Hi-Hi This high temperature The transformer oil is currently could be due to operating operating at a temperature above conditions or deficiency of the second level of alarm setting. the cooling system. The top oil temperature is currently Operating at this XX °C. temperature entails rapid oil The Top Oil Hi-Hi alarm setting is degradation. Overflow of currently YY °C. (The factory the oil conservator system default value is 95 °C) could be a consequence. Top-Oil Temperature Hi-Hi 34 and Top cooling mode not in service The transformer oil is currently operating at a temperature above the second level of alarm setting. This is apparently caused by a deficiency in the Cooling system. The top oil temperature is currently XX °C. The Top Oil Hi-Hi alarm setting is currently YY °C. (The factory default value is 95 °C) Part 18415 Recommendations • Make sure cooling system is fully operational and free from obstructions and dirt. • Check top-oil alarm setting. • Check load. • Check winding hot-spot temperature alarm setting and measured value. • Check ambient temperature. • Consider reducing load immediately. • Check Cooling Control conditions and settings. • Check power supply on top Operating at this cooling mode. temperature entails rapid oil • Check top-oil alarm setting. degradation. Overflow of • Check load. the oil conservator system • Check winding hot-spot could be a consequence. temperature alarm setting and Winding insulation could measured value. experience rapid aging. • Check ambient temperature. • Consider reducing load immediately. Rev. 7, December 2010 B-15 No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Recommendations Top-Oil Temperature Hi-Hi 35 and Load above rated value The transformer oil is currently operating at a temperature above the second level of alarm setting. This is apparently caused by the high load currently applied. The top oil temperature is currently XX °C. The Top Oil Hi-Hi alarm setting is currently YY °C. (The factory default value is 95 °C) • Make sure cooling system is fully operational and free from Operating at this obstructions and dirt. temperature entails rapid oil • Check ambient temperature. degradation. Overflow of • Check winding hot-spot the oil conservator system temperature alarm setting and could be a consequence. measured value. Winding hot-spot • Evaluate acceptable load in temperature alarm is to be regard to ambient temperature. expected. • Consider reducing load immediately. Top-Oil Temperature Hi-Hi 36 and Ambient temperature above 30 °C The transformer oil is currently operating at a temperature above the second level of alarm setting. This is apparently caused by the high ambient temperature. The top oil temperature is currently XX °C. The Top Oil Hi-Hi alarm setting is currently YY °C. (The factory default value is 95 °C) • Make sure cooling system is fully operational and free from obstructions and dirt. Operating at this • Check load. temperature entails rapid oil • Check winding hot-spot degradation. Overflow of temperature alarm setting and the oil conservator system measured value. could be a consequence. • Evaluate top-oil temperature in regard to ambient temperature. • Consider reducing load immediately. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 B-16 No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Recommendations The transformer winding is currently operating at a temperature above the first level of alarm Winding Hotsetting. Spot 37 The winding hot-spot temperature Temperature is currently XX °C. Hi The Winding hot-spot Hi alarm setting is currently YY °C. (The factory default value is 110 °C) • Check load level. High winding temperature • Make sure the cooling is fully leads to accelerated aging operational. of paper insulation. • Check winding hot-spot Maintaining this operating temperature alarm setting. condition may lead to a • If single-phase unit, check winding temperature alarm winding hot-spot temperature on of level # 2. other phases. • Consider reducing load. The transformer winding is currently operating at a temperature Winding Hotabove the first level of alarm Spot setting. This is apparently caused Temperature by a deficiency in the Cooling Hi 38 system. and The winding hot-spot temperature Top cooling is currently XX °C. mode not in The Winding hot-spot Hi alarm service setting is currently YY °C. (The factory default value is 110 °C) High winding temperature leads to accelerated aging of paper insulation. Maintaining this operating condition may lead to a winding temperature alarm of level # 2. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 • Switch to manual control on cooler and initiate full cooling. • Check Cooling Control conditions and settings. • Check winding temperature alarm setting. • Consider reducing load. B-17 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Recommendations Operating at high winding The transformer winding is temperature entails currently operating at a temperature accelerated aging of the Winding Hot- above the first level of alarm solid insulation. If this Spot setting. This could be a situation is maintained for Temperature consequence of operating at Load several days, it could lead to 39 Hi above rated value. significant degradation of and The winding hot-spot temperature the paper insulation. This Load above is currently XX °C. type of damage is rated value The Winding hot-spot Hi alarm irreversible. setting is currently YY °C. (The A top oil temperature alarm factory default value is 110 °C) may occur within minutes or hours. • Check load current. • Make sure the cooling is fully operational. • Check winding hot-spot temperature alarm setting. • If single-phase unit, check winding hot-spot temperature on other phases. • Consider loading history and acceptability of accelerated aging. • Evaluate winding hot-spot in regard to load and ambient temperature. • Consider reducing load. Operating at high winding temperature entails The transformer winding is accelerated aging of the Winding Hot- currently operating at a temperature solid insulation. If this Spot above the first level of alarm situation is maintained for Temperature setting. This could be caused by the several days, it could lead to Hi high ambient temperature. 40 significant degradation of and The winding hot-spot temperature the paper insulation. This Ambient is currently XX °C. type of damage is temperature The Winding hot-spot Hi alarm irreversible. A top oil above 30 °C setting is currently YY °C. (The temperature alarm may factory default value is 110 °C) occur within minutes or hours. • Check load current. • Make sure the cooling is at full capacity. • Check winding hot-spot temperature alarm setting. • Consider loading history and acceptability of accelerated aging. • Evaluate winding hot-spot in regard to load and ambient temperature. • Consider reducing load. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 B-18 No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Operating at high winding temperature entails accelerated aging of the solid insulation. If this The transformer winding is situation is maintained for currently operating at a temperature several hours or days, it above the second level of alarm Winding Hotcould lead to significant setting. Spot degradation of the paper 41 The winding hot-spot temperature Temperature insulation. This type of is currently XX °C. Hi-Hi damage is irreversible. If The Winding hot-spot Hi-Hi alarm the transformer is wet, this setting is currently YY °C. (The high temperature could factory default value is 120 °C) trigger evolution of free gas bubbles thus reducing the dielectric strength of insulation. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 Recommendations • Check load current. • Make sure the cooling is at full capacity. • Check winding hot-spot temperature alarm setting. • If single-phase unit, check winding hot-spot temperature on other phases. • Check for adequate bubbling temperature margin. • Consider reducing load or removing transformer from service. B-19 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Operating at high winding temperature entails accelerated aging of the The transformer winding is solid insulation. If this currently operating at a temperature Winding Hotsituation is maintained for above the second level of alarm Spot several hours or days, it setting. This is apparently caused Temperature could lead to significant by a deficiency of the cooling Hi-Hi degradation of the paper 42 system. and insulation. This type of The winding hot-spot temperature Top cooling damage is irreversible. If is currently XX °C. mode not in the transformer is wet, this The Winding hot-spot Hi-Hi alarm service high temperature could setting is currently YY °C. (The trigger evolution of free gas factory default value is 120 °C) bubbles thus reducing the dielectric strength of insulation. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 Recommendations • Switch to manual control on cooler and initiate full cooling. • Check Cooling Control conditions and settings. • Check winding hot-spot temperature alarm setting. • Check for adequate bubbling temperature margin. • Consider reducing load or removing transformer from service. B-20 No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Operating at high winding temperature entails accelerated aging of the The transformer winding is solid insulation. If this currently operating at a temperature situation is maintained for Winding Hot- above the second level of alarm several hours or days, it Spot setting. This could be a could lead to significant Temperature consequence of operating at load degradation of the paper 43 Hi-Hi above rated value. insulation. This type of and The winding hot-spot temperature damage is irreversible. If Load above is currently XX °C. the transformer is wet, this rated value The Winding hot-spot Hi-Hi alarm high temperature could setting is currently YY °C. (The trigger evolution of free gas factory default value is 120 °C) bubbles thus reducing the dielectric strength of insulation. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 Recommendations • Check load current. • Make sure the cooling is at full capacity. • Check winding hot-spot temperature alarm setting. • If single-phase unit, check winding hot-spot temperature on other phases. • Check for adequate bubbling temperature margin. • Consider reducing load or removing transformer from service. B-21 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Operating at high winding temperature entails accelerated aging of the The transformer winding is solid insulation. If this Winding Hot- currently operating at a temperature situation is maintained for Spot above the second level of alarm several hours or days, it Temperature setting. This is apparently caused could lead to significant Hi-Hi by the high ambient temperature. degradation of the paper 44 and The winding hot-spot temperature insulation. This type of Ambient is currently XX °C. damage is irreversible. If temperature The Winding hot-spot Hi-Hi alarm the transformer is wet, this above 30 °C setting is currently YY °C. (The high temperature could factory default value is 120 °C) trigger evolution of free gas bubbles thus reducing the dielectric strength of insulation. OLTC Short Term 45 Temperature Differential Hi Part 18415 The tap changer compartment is developing abnormally high temperature. The short-term average temperature difference with the main tank is currently XXX °C. The Short Term Temperature Differential Hi alarm setting is currently YY °C. (The factory default value is 5 °C averaged over 60 minutes) Recommendations • Check load current. • Make sure the cooling is at full capacity. • Check winding hot-spot temperature alarm setting. • Check for adequate bubbling temperature margin. • Consider reducing load or removing transformer from service. Short Term Temperature alarm can be indicative of severe heat source such as resistor overheating • Plan for inspection of OLTC. associated with rupture of • Check number of operations mechanical links. over last 24 hours. If unattended, the tap changer compartment may develop a Hi-Hi temperature alarm. Rev. 7, December 2010 B-22 No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Recommendations OLTC Short Term 46 Temperature Differential Hi-Hi The tap changer compartment is developing dangerously high temperature. The short-term average temperature difference with the main tank is currently XXX °C. The Short Term Temperature Differential Hi-Hi alarm setting is currently YY °C. (The factory default value is 15 °C averaged over 60 minutes) Thermal runaway of • Plan for immediate inspection of transition resistor or faulty OLTC. contact is to be expected. • Check oil level in OLTC conserFlashover in the tap changer vator. compartment is a risk with • Consider removing transformer possible damage to the from service. regulating winding. OLTC Long Term 47 Temperature Differential Hi The tap changer compartment is developing abnormally high temperature. The long-term average temperature difference with the main tank is currently XXX °C. The Long Term Temperature Differential Hi alarm setting is currently YY °C. (The factory default value is 2 °C averaged over 168 hours) Tap changer temperature will probably continue to increase, indicating a • Plan for inspection of OLTC. persistent hot spot. • Check number of operations If unattended, the tap over last 24 hours. changer compartment may develop a Hi-Hi temperature alarm. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 B-23 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Recommendations OLTC Long Term 48 Temperature Differential Hi-Hi The tap changer compartment is developing dangerously high temperature. The long-term average temperature difference with the main tank is currently XXX °C. The Long Term Temperature Differential Hi-Hi alarm setting is currently YY °C. (The factory default value is 10 °C averaged over 168 hours) Thermal runaway of faulty • Plan for immediate inspection of contact is to be expected. OLTC. Flashover in the tap changer • Check oil level in OLTC consercompartment is a risk with vator. possible damage to the • Consider removing transformer regulating winding. from service. Number of operations 49 since last Maintenance The number of tap changer operations since the last maintenance is currently exceeding the warning level. The warning level is currently set at XXX operations. (The factory default value is 30,000 operations) After a certain number of operations, tap changers • Check with tap changer require maintenance to operation counter. insure trouble-free • Check manufacturer recommenoperation. dation on tap changer mainteLack of maintenance can nance. lead to tap changer damage • Plan for tap changer mainteand eventually destruction nance. of the regulating winding. Elapsed time 50 since last Maintenance The time elapsed since the last maintenance of tap changer is currently exceeding the warning level. The warning level is currently set at XXX years. (The factory default value is 5 years) After a certain time period, • Check with tap changer tap changers require operation counter. maintenance to insure • Check manufacturer recommentrouble-free operation. dation on tap changer mainteLack of maintenance can nance. lead to tap changer damage • Plan for tap changer mainteand eventually destruction nance. of the regulating winding. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 B-24 No Condition Elapsed time since last 51 Reversing Switch Operation Diagnostic Prognostic The reversing switch has been in the same position for a time duration exceeding the warning limit The warning time limit for reversing switch operation is currently set at XXX days. (The factory default value is 365 days) Recommendations Most tap changers have a reversing switch allowing • Check manufacturer recommenconnection of the regulating dation for minimum reversing winding in additive or switch operation. subtractive polarity. Lack • Plan for a short transformer of operation of the outage to allow operation of tap reversing switch often leads changer across the full range. to contact heating. The tap changer is currently operating at a rate exceeding the Maximum warning set point. number of tap The warning set point for operating 52 operations per rate is currently set at hour XXX operations per hour. (The factory default value is 10 operations per hour) Excessive number of operations may lead to premature aging of tap changer. This situation may be justified by unusual operating conditions or it may be caused by maladjustment of voltage regulation control system. • Check voltage regulation control for insufficient dead band. The tap changer is currently operating at a rate exceeding the Maximum warning set point. number of tap The warning set point for operating 53 operations per rate is currently set at day XXX operations per day. (The factory default value is 100 operations per day). Excessive number of operations may lead to premature aging of tap changer. This situation may be justified by unusual operating conditions or it may be caused by maladjustment of voltage regulation control system. • Check voltage regulation control for insufficient dead band. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 B-25 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice No Condition Bubbling 54 Temperature Margin Diagnostic Prognostic Considering the moisture content of winding insulation and the current temperature of winding insulation, there is a risk of generating free gas bubbles in the insulation. The minimum margin between winding hot-spot and bubbling inception temperatures is currently set at XX °C. (The factory default value is 20 °C) The level of water in oil is such that if the transformer is allowed to cool down rapidly, the condensation would take place at temperature of XXX °C. Water-Oil Maximum condensation 55 Condensation temperature is currently set at Temperature XX °C and oil should be maintained dry enough to condensate at a lower temperature. (The factory default value is 20 °C). Part 18415 Recommendations If hot-spot temperature is allowed to increase still • Reduce hot-spot temperature further, free gas bubbles (reduce load, or improve may be released from cooling). winding insulation thus • Check for water content in oil jeopardizing the dielectric and in paper. strength of insulation. • Compare water sensor with This could lead to dielectric laboratory measurement. failure of the transformer. Water saturation characteristic of insulating oil is highly non linear. At high temperature oil can carry a • Check the amount of water in large amount of water, but transformer oil. if ambient temperature is • Consider raising the condenlow and transformer is sation alarm set point if ambient allowed to cool down temperature allows for this. rapidly, the water content in • Plan for drying the transformer. oil may exceed the saturation characteristic and free water will appear in the transformer oil. Rev. 7, December 2010 B-26 No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Cooling 56 Efficiency Index The transformer top-oil temperature is currently higher than it should be, considering recent loading and ambient temperature conditions. The cooling efficiency index alarm is currently set at XXX °C. (The factory default value is 10 °C, averaged over a 24-hour period) Cooling capacity of the cooling system is apparently deteriorating. Problems could arise if higher loading or higher ambient temperature takes place. 57 System Fault The system fault triggers show a problem with the • Proceed as indicated in the The monitoring system is not monitoring system itself. chapter Troubleshooting in the functioning properly. It could be Alarms set as system fault Instruction Manual. Method for power supply, Hydran sensor triggers can trigger the trouble identification is provided temperature, low battery voltage or “System OK” relay, which along with procedure to correct some other essential functions. turns off the green LED on the problem. the monitoring system. Sensor Card 58 #1 Comm. Error A faulty CanBUS • Locate corresponding cable. connection between the • Verify thoroughly the chain of A sensor card communication error Input/Output board and the connection including connectors. has been detected on card #1. controller board is • Proceed as indicated in the probable. Instruction Manual. Top Oil 59 Temperature Input Fault The top-oil temperature sensor is not available any more and a N/A value will be recorded in the data acquisition files. Part 18415 Recommendations • Plan checking for obstruction, dirt and pollen in the heat exchangers. • Plan checking pumps and fans for proper operation. A lost input connection on • Repair the cable connection to the top oil will disable all reactivate the top-oil temperature models requiring this input sensor. value. Rev. 7, December 2010 B-27 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Ambient 60 Temperature Input Fault The ambient temperature sensor is not available any more and a N/A value will be recorded in the data acquisition files. A lost input connection on the ambient temperature will disable all models requiring this input value. • Repair the cable connection to reactivate the ambient temperature sensor. Bottom Oil 61 Temperature Input Fault The bottom-oil temperature sensor is not available any more and a N/A value will be recorded in the data acquisition files. A lost input connection on the bottom oil will disable all models requiring this input value. • Repair the cable connection to reactivate the bottom-oil temperature sensor. The current consumed by cooling bank 1 is lower than the preset Cooling alarm level. 62 Deficiency in The alarm level for bank 1 Bank 1 deficiency is XX % of rated current in bank 1. (The factory default value is 70 % of bank current) Recommendations Reduction of cooling bank current is indicative of part • Check cooling bank 1 to identify of the cooling bank being the component not operating. inoperative. Some of the • Plan maintenance activity to fans or a pump might be restore full cooling capability. missing or disconnected. This high current is indicative of some bearing The current drawn by cooling starting to grip or other bank 1 is higher than the threshold obstruction to the free • Check cooling bank 1 to identify Bearing value for cooling bank gripping. moving of fans and pumps. the component malfunctioning. 63 Deficiency in This alarm level is currently set at Prolonged operation in this • Plan maintenance activity to Bank 1 XXX % of rated bank 1 current. condition might trip the restore full cooling capability. (The factory default value is 150 % thermal protection on this of bank current) device and reduce the cooling capability. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 B-28 No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic The current consumed by cooling bank 2 is lower than the preset Cooling alarm level. 64 Deficiency in The alarm level for bank 2 Bank 2 deficiency is XX % of rated current in bank 2. (The factory default value is 70 % of bank current) Recommendations Reduction of cooling bank current is indicative of part • Check cooling bank 1 to identify of the cooling bank being the component not operating. inoperative. Some of the • Plan maintenance activity to fans or a pump might be restore full cooling capability. missing or disconnected. This high current is indicative of some bearing The current drawn by cooling starting to grip or other bank 2 is higher than the threshold obstruction to the free • Check cooling bank 2 to identify Bearing value for cooling bank gripping. moving of fans and pumps. the component malfunctioning. 65 Deficiency in This alarm level is currently set at Prolonged operation in this • Plan maintenance activity to Bank 2 XXX % of rated bank 2 current. condition might trip the restore full cooling capability. (The factory default value is 150 % thermal protection on this of bank current) device and reduce the cooling capability. Cooling discrepancy 66 Stage 1 Alarm Part 18415 An anomaly has been detected in the cooling control. Either the cooling stage 1 should presently be in operation and it is not or the opposite, it is operating when it should not. Unavailability of cooling stage 2 may lead to • Check availability of auxiliary transformer overheating power on the cooling system. and to Top Oil Temperature • Check for operation of the motor or Winding Hot-Spot overload protection. Temperature alarms. Rev. 7, December 2010 B-29 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Recommendations Cooling discrepancy 67 Stage 2 Alarm An anomaly has been detected in the cooling control. Either the cooling stage 2 should presently be in operation and it is not or the opposite, it is operating when it should not. Analog User 68 Defined #1 Low-Low The analog sensor defined by user as sensor #1 is showing a Low-Low alarm. No prognostic can be Nature and purpose of this sensor is provided. not known to the system and no diagnostic can be provided. • No recommendation can be provided. Analog User 69 Defined #1 Low The analog sensor defined by user as sensor #1 is showing a Low alarm. No prognostic can be Nature and purpose of this sensor is provided. not known to the system and no diagnostic can be provided. • No recommendation can be provided. Analog User 70 Defined #1 High The analog sensor defined by user as sensor #1 is showing a High alarm. No prognostic can be Nature and purpose of this sensor is provided. not known to the system and no diagnostic can be provided. • No recommendation can be provided. Part 18415 Unavailability of cooling stage 3 may lead to • Check availability of auxiliary transformer overheating power on the cooling system. and to Top Oil Temperature • Check for operation of the motor or Winding Hot-Spot overload protection. Temperature alarms. Rev. 7, December 2010 B-30 No Condition Diagnostic Prognostic Recommendations Analog User 71 Defined #1 High-High The analog sensor defined by user as sensor #1 is showing a HighHigh alarm. No prognostic can be Nature and purpose of this sensor is provided. not known to the system and no diagnostic can be provided. • No recommendation can be provided. Analog User 72 Defined #1 Sensor Fault The analog sensor #1 defined by user is not available any more and a No prognostic can be N/A value will be recorded in the provided. data acquisition files. • No recommendation can be provided. Analog User Defined #2 73 Analog User to Defined #3 87 Analog User Defined #4 Each of Analog User Defined #2, #3 and #4 inputs will generate 5 alarms having Diagnostic No prognostic can be description same as description of provided. No 68 to 72 but replace #1 with #2, #3 and #4. • No recommendation can be provided. Any Alarm 1st Level set for an Analog Input other Currently this system cannot 88 than Top Oil provide any diagnostic for the Temperature selected Alarm condition. and of any of the 4 Digital Input Spares Part 18415 No prognostic can be provided. Rev. 7, December 2010 • No recommendation can be provided. B-31 Appendix B • Alarm Conditions and Advice PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 B-32 Appendix C Models Configuration Guide This Appendix is intended to facilitate the configuration of models, inputs plugin and alarms in the Hydran M2 With Models and Intellix MO150 Devices using the Multi Host software. Some of the parameters required for configuration are to be found: • • • • On the transformer, bushings or tap changer (OLTC) nameplates In the test report In the maintenance manual In the technical specifications Some of these documents might not be available and some values might not be found in any of these documents. Advices are therefore provided to help the user select the most appropriate value for initial configuration. C.1 INPUT PLUGIN CONFIGURATION This Section describes basic settings of the plugin and analog input configuration. If the applicable Setup menu has not been opened yet, in the Configuration menu select Setup. The applicable Setup menu must be open in order to access the PlugIns section for the Hydran M2 (in Figure C-1 on page C-2) or the Intellix MO150 I/O Card section for the Intellix MO150 (in Figure C-2 on page C-3). Plugin or analog input can be assigned and configured as a temperature, current or tap position sensor. These different configurations and their parameters are described in this Section. Note: The options and parameters presented in this Section apply to all versions of the Multi Host software used and all types of Device connected. However, the screen displays may slightly differ from the Figures in this Section depending on the software versions and the Device types. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-1 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide Figure C-1 - Setup Menu for the Hydran M2 C-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Input Plugin Configuration Figure C-2 - Setup Menu for the Intellix MO150 Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-3 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide C.1.1 Temperature Sensor Setting 1. Sensor Assignation Once the appropriate plugin/analog input has been chosen by clicking it, it can be assigned to the desired temperature sensor. In Figure C-3 on page C-4 for the Hydran M2 or Figure C-4 on page C-4 for the Intellix MO150, proceed as follows: • In the Value Selection or Output Model drop-down list (circle No. 1), select between Top Oil Temp, OLTC Tank Temp, Ambient Temp and Bottom Oil Temp. Note: A State reading of -25.00 % indicates that no sensor is connected. • For the Intellix MO150: In the Type drop-down list, select between Analog Input and RTD Input (Resistive Thermal Detector). Figure C-3 - Temperature Sensor Assignation Panel for the Hydran M2 Figure C-4 - Temperature Sensor Assignation Panel for the Intellix MO150 C-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Input Plugin Configuration 2. Sensor Calibration Once the plugin/analog input has been assigned to the desired temperature input, it can be configured by clicking Top Oil Temperature Input below the chosen plugin/analog input in the arborescence. See Figure C-5 on page C-5 for the Hydran M2 or Figure C-6 on page C-6 for the Intellix MO150. Figure C-5 - Temperature Sensor Calibration Menu for the Hydran M2 Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-5 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide Figure C-6 - Temperature Sensor Calibration Menu for the Intellix MO150 Click Top Oil Temperature Input in Figure C-5 on page C-5 or Figure C-6 on page C-6, and the panel shown in Figure C-7 on page C-6 is displayed. Figure C-7 - Temperature Sensor Calibration Panel C-6 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Input Plugin Configuration • Set the Minimum Value (circle No. 2), which refers to the temperature of the sensor when it provides a current of 4 mA. • Set the Maximum Value (circle No. 2), which refers to the temperature of the sensor when it provides a current of 20 mA. 3. Top Oil Temperature This is the value (circle No. 3) that the Device will see, considering the current configuration of the temperature sensor. This display allows for verification of proper configuration. This configuration method applies to all temperatures to be measured: Top Oil Temp, OLTC Tank Temp, Ambient Temp and Bottom Oil Temp. C.1.2 Current Sensor Setting 1. Sensor Assignation Once the appropriate plugin has been chosen by clicking it, it can be assigned to the desired current sensor. Proceed as follows: • For the Hydran M2: In Figure C-8 on page C-7, in the Value Selection drop-down list (circle No. 1), select between Winding H Current, Winding X Current and Winding Y Current. Figure C-8 - Current Sensor Assignation Panel for the Hydran M2 • For the Intellix MO150: The current assignments are fixed and can be found in the same section (Intellix MO150 I/O Card) in Figure C-2 on page C-3 but as a Current Input instead of an Analog Input. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-7 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide Once the input has been assigned to the desired winding current, it can be configured by clicking the parameter that appears under the chosen plugin/current input. In Figure C-9 on page C-8 for the Hydran M2, it is the Winding H Current Input; in Figure C-10 on page C-9 for the Intellix MO150, it is the Load Current H. Figure C-9 - Current Menu for the Hydran M2 C-8 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Input Plugin Configuration Figure C-10 - Current Menu for the Intellix MO150 Clicking the measured value (Winding H Current Input or Load Current H) displays the panels shown in Figure C-11 on page C-10 for the Hydran M2 and Figure C-12 on page C-10 for the Intellix MO150. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-9 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide Figure C-11 - Current Settings Panel for the Hydran M2 Figure C-12 - Current Settings Panel for the Intellix MO150 2. Probe Full Scale The load current is usually measured with a clip-on current probe installed in the transformer control cabinet on the secondary of the current transducer corresponding to the current to be measured. The full-scale value of the probe must be configured (circle No. 2). The most common current probes have outputs such as 0–5 A, 0–10 A or 0–50 A. 3. CT Primary/Secondary Ratio This Current Transducer (CT) is part of the transformer and is usually located inside the main tank, around the bushing. The ratio of this CT is to be found on the transformer nameplate. The configuration CT Primary Ratio and CT Secondary Ratio (circle No. 3) do not accept decimal values; but since it is only the ratio between the two values that is significant, it is acceptable to multiply both values by a suitable factor. C-10 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Input Plugin Configuration If for some reasons the CT ratio is not available, it is possible to approximate the configuration values as follows: • Enter the same value that was configured as Probe Full Scale in CT Secondary Ratio. • Calculate the value to be configured as CT Primary Ratio as follows: CT Primary Ratio = Present load current value / State This configuration method applies to all currents values to be measured: Winding H Current, Winding X Current and Winding Y Current. C.1.3 Tap Position Sensor Setting 1. Sensor Assignation Once the appropriate plugin/analog input has been selected by clicking it, it can be assigned to the desired tap position sensor. In Figure C-13 on page C-11 for the Hydran M2 or Figure C-14 on page C-11 for the Intellix MO150, use the Value Selection or Output Model drop-down list (circle No. 1). Figure C-13 - Tap Position Sensor Assignation Panel for the Hydran M2 Figure C-14 - Tap Position Sensor Assignation Panel for the Intellix MO150 Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-11 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide 2. Sensor State This number (circle No. 2) indicates the current value of the sensor, with a configuration of 4–20 mA (0 % corresponds to 4 mA and 100 % corresponds to 20 mA). Once the input has been assigned to the desired ap position input, it can be configured by clicking the parameter that appears below the chosen plugin/analog input in the arborescence. Clicking Tap Position Input displays the panel shown in Figure C-15 on page C-12. Figure C-15 - Tap Position Settings Panel 3. Maximum Mechanical Tap Position The number of tap positions is configured in this field (circle No. 3). This information is found on the transformer nameplate. What is meant here is the “electrical position” by opposition to the “mechanical position,” the latter including the “through positions” needed to go through the neutral position. Other parameters of the tap changers will be configured in Section C.3.11 on page C-56. 4. Mechanical Tap Position This value (circle No. 4) is the actual position of the tap deducted from the reading of the input. C.2 ALARM CONFIGURATION After the plugin/analog and current inputs have been correctly assigned to their respective sensor, the alarms settings can be configured. All of the alarm configurations in this Section can be accessed in the Alarm Setup section shown in Figure C-16 on page C-13 for the Hydran M2 or Figure C-17 on page C-14 for the Intellix MO150. C-12 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Alarm Configuration Note: The alarm configuration of an input sensor is only displayed if this sensor is assigned to a plugin/analog input. Figure C-16 - Alarm Setup Menu for the Hydran M2 Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-13 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide Figure C-17 - Alarm Setup Menu for the Intellix MO150 C.2.1 Top Oil Temperature Selecting Top Oil Temperature in Figure C-16 on page C-13 or Figure C-17 on page C-14 displays the panel shown in Figure C-18 on page C-15. 1. Alarm Parameters It is possible to adjust the Alarm Delay (circle No. 1). Setting it to 0 minute will result in an instant alarm if conditions are reached. Sometimes it can be useful to set it to a higher value to eliminate alarms due to fluctuating readings. For the same reason, the Alarm Deadband can be configured. C-14 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Alarm Configuration Figure C-18 - Top Oil Temperature Alarm Settings Panel 2. Alarm Set Points The default values are 85 °C for the High Alarm Set Point and 95 °C for the High-High Alarm Set Point (circle No. 2). However the top oil temperature alarm should be somewhat higher than the value allowed for normal operating conditions. It may also be wise to avoid undue alarms during planned overload condition. Note: With the above rated temperature, there is a risk of oil overflow unless the conservator has been designed to account for overloading conditions. The alarm settings should also consider the reference standard supporting the transformer design. The values presented in Table C-1 on page C-16 can be used to set the alarm levels. Note: The alarms can be enabled [] or disabled [ ] by clicking the Enabled check box as well as the Input Fault Alarm. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-15 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide Table C-1 - Top Oil Temperature Alarm Set Points Maximum Top Oil Temperature in Normal Service Acceptable Top Oil Temperature Under Planned Overload IEC Loading Guide 90 °C 105 °C IEEE Loading Guide for 65 °C average winding rise 95 °C 110 °C IEEE Loading Guide for 55 °C average winding rise 85 °C 100 °C Reference Standard 3. Alarm Relays If desired, it is also possible to assign the High and High-High alarms to relays (circle No. 3). C.2.2 Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Selecting Hot-Spot Temperature in Figure C-16 on page C-13 or Figure C-17 on page C-14 displays the panel shown in Figure C-19 on page C-17. 1. Alarm Parameters It is possible to adjust the Alarm Delay (circle No. 1). Setting it to 0 minute will result in an instant alarm if conditions are reached. Sometimes it can be useful to set it to a higher value to eliminate alarms due to fluctuating readings. For the same reason, the Alarm Deadband can be configured. 2. Alarm Set Points The default values are 110 °C for the High Alarm Set Point and 120 °C for the High-High Alarm Set Point (circle No. 2). These values can be adjusted to account for the probability of overloading and the reference standard supporting the transformer design. The values presented in Table C-2 on page C-17 can be used to set the alarm levels. Note: The alarms can be enabled [] or disabled [ ] by clicking the Enabled check box. C-16 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Alarm Configuration Figure C-19 - Hot-Spot Temperature Alarm Settings Panel Table C-2 - Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Alarm Set Points Maximum Winding Hot-Spot Temperature in Normal Service Acceptable Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Under Planned Overload IEC Loading Guide 98 °C 120 °C IEEE Loading Guide for 65 °C average winding rise 110 °C 130 °C IEEE Loading Guide for 55 °C average winding rise 95 °C 115 °C Reference Standard 3. Alarm Relays If desired, it is also possible to assign the High and High-High alarms to relays (circle No. 3). Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-17 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide C.2.3 Water-Oil Condensation Temperature Selecting the Water-Oil Condensation Temperature displays the panel shown in Figure C-20 on page C-18. Figure C-20 - Water-Oil Condensation Temperature Alarm Settings Panel 1. Alarm Parameters It is possible to adjust the Alarm Delay (circle No. 1). Setting it to 0 minute will result in an instant alarm if conditions are reached. Sometimes it can be useful to set it to a higher value to eliminate alarms due to fluctuating readings. For the same reason, the Alarm Deadband can be configured. 2. Alarm Set Points This alarm should be set at the lowest temperature expected for this transformer (circle No. 2). Typically this is for winter conditions, with the transformer deenergized. The lowest average temperature for a 24-hour period should be used. Note: The alarm can be enabled [] or disabled [ ] by clicking the Enabled check box. 3. Alarm Relays If desired, it is also possible to assign the High alarm to a relay (circle No. 3). C-18 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Alarm Configuration C.2.4 Bubbling Temperature Margin Selecting Bubbling Temperature Margin in Figure C-16 on page C-13 or Figure C-17 on page C-14 displays the panel shown in Figure C-21 on page C-19. Figure C-21 - Bubbling Temperature Margin Alarm Settings Panel 1. Alarm Parameters It is possible to adjust the Alarm Delay (circle No. 1). Setting it to 0 minute will result in an instant alarm if conditions are reached. Sometimes it can be useful to set it to a higher value to eliminate alarms due to fluctuating readings. For the same reason, the Alarm Deadband can be configured. 2. Alarm Set Points This safety margin is intended to ensure the present hot-spot temperature remains below the temperature threshold where free gas bubbles could be released, considering the present moisture content in winding insulation. The default value of 20 °C (circle No. 2) is adequate for most applications. Note: The alarm can be enabled [] or disabled [ ] by clicking the Enabled check box. 3. Alarm Relays If desired, it is also possible to assign the Low alarm to a relay (circle No. 3). Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-19 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide C.2.5 Tap Position Tracking Selecting Tap Position Tracking in Figure C-16 on page C-13 or Figure C-17 on page C-14 displays the panel shown in Figure C-22 on page C-20. Figure C-22 - Tap Position Tracking Alarm Settings Panel 1. Number of operations since last Maintenance The tap changer manufacturer usually states the maximum number of operations that is allowed without maintenance. This value is to be found in the tap changer Maintenance C-20 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Alarm Configuration Manual. It is typically between 10,000 and 100,000 operations. The alarm can be set at 90 % of that value to provide some lead time for the planning of maintenance activities. Note: All the alarms in Figure C-22 on page C-20 can be enabled [] or disabled [ ] by clicking the Enabled check box. If desired, it is also possible to assign the alarms to a relay. 2. Elapsed Time since last Maintenance Beside the number of operations, the tap changer Maintenance Manual also provides a maximum time span between inspections. It is typically between 3 and 6 years. The alarm can be set at 90 % of that value. 3. Days Elapsed since last Reversing Switch Operation Depending on the transformer operating conditions, the reversing switch might remain in the same position for several years. This condition often leads to contact overheating and tap changer damage. The manufacturer usually recommends that this contact be operated at least once a year. Therefore the most common set point for this alarm is 365 days. 4. Maximum Number of Tap Operations per Hour In transmission networks, the tap changer operates typically a few times every hour. An alarm set point of 10 operations per hour is reasonable. In industrial applications, this value can be 10 times larger. Too many operations can indicate a deficient setting of the tap changer control system and the operator should be notified of this condition. 5. Maximum Number of Tap Operations per Day In transmission networks, the tap changer operates typically 10 to 30 times a day. An alarm set point of 100 operations per day is reasonable. In industrial applications, this value can be 10 times larger. Too many operations can indicate a deficient setting of the tap changer control system and the operator should be alerted about this condition. C.2.6 OLTC Temperature For this alarm, there are two different settings. In the Alarm Setup section shown in Figure C-17 on page C-14, click the “+” to the left of OLTC Temperature. Selecting OLTC Temperature Long Term displays the panel shown in Figure C-23 on page C-22, Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-21 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide and selecting OLTC Temperature Short Term displays the panel shown in Figure C-24 on page C-22. Figure C-23 - OLTC Temperature Long Term Alarm Settings Panel Figure C-24 - OLTC Temperature Short Term Alarm Settings Panel C-22 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Alarm Configuration 1. Alarm Parameters It is possible to adjust the Alarm Delay (circle No. 1). Setting it to 0 second will result in an instant alarm if conditions are reached. Sometimes it can be useful to set it to a higher value to eliminate alarms due to fluctuating readings. For the same reason, the Alarm Deadband can be configured. 2. Alarm Set Points The default values are the following (circle No. 2): • • • • 2 °C for the High Alarm Set Point for the long term 10 °C for the High-High Alarm Set Point for the long term 5 °C for the High Alarm Set Point for the short term 15 °C for the High-High Alarm Set Point for the short term These values are commonly used in several applications and can later be readjusted depending on operating conditions. Note: The alarms can be enabled [] or disabled [ ] by clicking the Enabled check box. 3. Alarm Relays If desired, it is also possible to assign the High and High-High alarms to relays (circle No. 3). C.2.7 Cooling Efficiency Index Selecting Cooling Efficiency Index in Figure C-16 on page C-13 or Figure C-17 on page C-14 displays the panel shown in Figure C-25 on page C-24. 1. Alarm Parameters It is possible to adjust the Alarm Delay (circle No. 1). Setting it to 0 second will result in an instant alarm if conditions are reached. Sometimes it can be useful to set it to a higher value to eliminate alarms due to fluctuating readings. For the same reason, the Alarm Deadband can be configured. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-23 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide 2. Alarm Set Points The default value of 10 °C (circle No. 2) is adequate in most cases. It could be adjusted eventually as experience is gained for a particular application. Note: The alarm can be enabled [] or disabled [ ] by clicking the Enabled check box. Figure C-25 - Cooling Efficiency Index Alarm Settings Panel 3. Alarm Relays If desired, it is also possible to assign the High alarm to a relay (circle No. 3). C.3 MODELS CONFIGURATION After the plugin/analog and current inputs have been correctly assigned to their respective sensor, and after the alarms settings have been correctly configured, the transformer models can be configured to match your actual transformer setup. All of the models configurations in this Section can be accessed in the Models section shown in Figure C-26 on page C-25 for the Hydran M2 or Figure C-27 on page C-26 for the Intellix MO150. Note: Only the models associated with a plugin/analog input are displayed. C-24 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration Figure C-26 - Models Setup Menu for the Hydran M2 Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-25 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide Figure C-27 - Models Setup Menu for the Intellix MO150 C.3.1 Moisture Reading Setup Selecting Moisture Reading Setup in Figure C-26 on page C-25 or Figure C-27 on page C-26 displays the panel shown in Figure C-28 on page C-27. 1. %RH Average Period The relative humidity value read by the moisture sensor must be filtered to remove the effect of periodic heating of the sensor by the Dynamic Oil Sampling system. The default value of 48 hours is recommended in most cases (circle No. 1). C-26 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration Figure C-28 - Moisture Reading Setup Panel 2. Type of Oil Different oils have different water saturation characteristics. These characteristics are used to convert relative humidity (%RH) to absolute water content in oil (ppm). Note that the saturation characteristics used in the Device are applicable only for new oils. It is known that aged oil has different saturation characteristics and the ppm value displayed may not match the value measured by other means (Karl Fisher test). These saturation characteristics are used mainly to display an indicative ppm value and have little impact on the calculation of moisture in paper. Mineral oil is always a mixture of naphthenic, paraffinic and aromatic structures. Most commercial oils can be classified as naphthenic due to the relative amount of this structure. Some oils have an aromatic component that can reach 21 % and display more affinity for water. The second characteristic in the menu is intended for those. Information about the specific amount of each structure is not always available; in that case, Naphthenic should be the selected in the Type of Oil drop-down list (circle No. 2) as this is the most common oil type. Silicon oil and natural ester oil have significantly different saturation characteristics. If these types of oil are present in the transformer, the configuration must be set accordingly. 3. Standard Temperature for RH It is often preferred to compare the relative humidity among a group of transformers. To do so, the relative humidity must be referenced to a uniform temperature. This standard temperature reference is usually 20 °C (circle No. 3). Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-27 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide 4. Oil type coefficients (A, B and C) Users that know the saturation characteristics of the oil used should select User Defined in the Type of Oil drop-down list (circle No. 2). Three additional fields are then provided to enter the Oil type coefficients A to C (circle No. 4). C.3.2 Winding Current Setup Selecting Winding Current Setup in Figure C-26 on page C-25 or Figure C-27 on page C-26 displays the panel shown in Figure C-29 on page C-28. Figure C-29 - Winding Current Setup Panel Note: This panel is dynamically created according to the type and number of analog inputs defined in Section C.1 on page C-1. In the example illustrated in Figure C-29 on page C-28, the load current is being measured only on the H winding. 1. Winding H, X, Y and C Rated Current The rated current of each winding is essential for several models. A default value cannot be used. The rated current for each winding is available from the transformer nameplate. The value required for configuration is the one applicable on the top cooling mode. For transformers with tap changers, the rated current is the value at mid-tap position. Sometimes the loading capacity at the lower ambient temperature (typically 0 °C) is mentioned in the technical data. This value should be disregarded. The system configuration uses the rated current at rated temperature, and considers overloads as they occur. In IEC, the rated power is intended for a monthly average ambient temperature not exceeding 30 °C and a yearly average ambient temperature not exceeding 20 °C. In IEEE, the rated power applies for an average daily temperature of 30 °C with peaks not exceeding 40 °C. C-28 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration The rated load current is expressed in amperes (A) and is configurable from 1 to 5,000 A for the H winding (circle No. 1) and from 1 to 50,000 A for the X and Y windings. The C winding is applicable only for autotransformers and it refers to the “common” winding (in opposition to the “series” winding); it is configurable from 1 to 50,000 A. Before configuration, a default value of 250 A is shown for all current configuration fields. C.3.3 Apparent Power Setup Selecting Apparent Power Setup in Figure C-26 on page C-25 or Figure C-27 on page C-26 displays the panel shown in Figure C-30 on page C-29. Figure C-30 - Apparent Power Setup Panel Note: This panel is dynamically created according to the type and number of analog inputs defined in Section C.1 on page C-1. In the example illustrated in Figure C-30 on page C-29, the load current is being measured only on the H winding. Therefore the rated voltage is needed only on this winding. 1. Number of Phases Transformers can be single-phase or three-phase. This information (circle No. 1) is available on the nameplate and in the test report as part of the transformer identification, and it is essential for the Apparent Power model (Chapter 6). 2. Rated Voltage on HV side The rated voltage for each winding can be derived from the nameplate. For three-phase transformers, the value required is the line-to-line voltage. For single-phase transformers, the values required are as indicated on the transformer nameplate: line-to-ground voltage for star windings, and line-to-line voltage for delta windings. For transformers with tap changers, the mid-tap position voltage is used. The rated voltage is also expressed in kilovolts (kV) as “No-Load Transformation Ratio”. It is configurable from 10 to 1,500 kV for the H and X windings, and from 3 to 1,500 kV for the Y winding. Before configuration, Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-29 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide a default value of 100 kV is displayed. This information (circle No. 2) is essential for the Apparent Power model (Chapter 6). Note: The additional parameters Rated Current on winding H, X and Y are to be configured in the Winding Current Setup (see Section C.3.2 on page C-28). C.3.4 Winding Hot-Spot Temperature and Transformer Type Setup Selecting WHST and Transformer Type Setup in Figure C-26 on page C-25 or Figure C-27 on page C-26 displays the panel shown in Figure C-31 on page C-30 for the Hydran M2 and in Figure C-32 on page C-31 for the Intellix MO150. Figure C-31 - WHST and Transformer Type Setup Panel for the Hydran M2 Note: These panels are dynamically created according to the type and number of analog inputs defined in Section C.1 on page C-1. In the examples illustrated in Figure C-31 on page C-30 and Figure C-32 on page C-31, the load current is being measured only on the H winding for the Hydran M2 and on the three windings for the Intellix MO150. 1. Transformer Type Select between Transformer and Autotransformer (circle No. 1). This selection is necessary to calculate correctly the load current in the common winding of autotransformers. If the unit is an autotransformer, it should be indicated on the nameplate. This construction is more cost efficient for transmission-type transformers, where the primary and secondary voltages are similar with a ratio below 1.5. When no information is available, the default value is Transformer. C-30 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration Figure C-32 - WHST and Transformer Type Setup Panel for the Intellix MO150 2. Winding Exponent (m) The winding exponent “m” (circle No. 2) relates the hot-spot rise above top-oil to the load level. It is normally calculated only for the top cooling mode. If the average winding temperature has been measured with several load levels, the winding exponent “m” can be derived from the temperature rise tests. In most cases this information is not available and the following default values can be used: • Cooling modes beginning with “OF” or “ON”: 0.8 • Cooling modes beginning with “OD”: 1.0 3. Winding Time Constant This value is not critical and only modifies the response time to an overload of significant magnitude. It is a function of the winding thermal capacity. If no values are shown in the test report, the default value of 6 minutes can be used (circle No. 3). A single value is used Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-31 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide for all windings. If different values are available for each winding, the shortest one should be used. 4. Rated Hot-Spot Rise Above Top Oil The winding hottest-spot temperature rise above top oil (circle No. 4) is critical for the calculation of the winding hot-spot and insulation aging, and efforts should be made to get the proper values. This is probably the most difficult value to extract from transformer documentation as it is not actually measured during temperature rise tests and it is usually not indicated on the transformer nameplate. In documents produced in accord with IEC practices, the rated hot-spot rise is often expressed in degrees Kelvin (K) instead of degrees Celsius (°C) since it is a temperature difference and not an absolute value. For the purpose of this configuration, Kelvin is the same as Celsius. The “Rated Hot-Spot Rise Above Top Oil” refers to the top oil temperature as measured with a Resistive Thermal Detector (RTD) inserted in a thermowell on the top of the transformer or on the tank wall near the top. This is the standard device used during temperature rise tests to establish the “Rated Top Oil Rise”. In the Hydran M2 With Models or Intellix MO150 Device, the top oil temperature is often measured with a magmount temperature sensor. In this case, the measured temperature is likely lower by a few degrees than the RTD in the oil well. The Rated Hot-Spot Rise Above Top Oil should be increased accordingly to reflect the correct hot-spot temperature. If no measurements are available, a default correction of 5 °C can be used. The winding hot-spot temperature rise is needed on the top cooling mode, at rated load, for each winding to be monitored. The rated hot-spot rise is configurable from 1 to 50 °C and the default value is 30 °C. Usually a different value is applicable for each winding but the same value can be used for all windings if a single value is available. The following methods (in descending order of preference) can be applied to find this value: A) Direct Measurement With Fiber Optic Sensor Reference documents: Transformer test report; Temperature rise test; Fiber optic temperature data. C-32 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration Some new transformers are provided with fiber optic temperature sensors directly embedded in the windings. These sensors should be in service during the temperature rise test and provide a direct access to the hot-spot temperature at rated load. If such device is available, the measured value should be used and compared to the top oil temperature to derive the winding hot-spot rise above top oil. This method would normally provide separate measurements for the primary and secondary windings. B) Manufacturer Calculation Reference documents: Transformer test report; Temperature rise test. In the normal process of transformer design, manufacturers use computer programs to calculate the losses in every conductor, the heat exchange with circulating oil, and the resulting temperature of winding conductors. On recent units it is possible to find these calculated values in the test report or on the transformer nameplate. These values can be used to calculate the hot-spot rise above top-oil. C) Calculation From Temperature Rise Test Data Reference documents: Transformer test report; Temperature rise test. The temperature rise test, also known as “heat-run test”, is not carried out on each transformer. It is considered by most utilities as a “type test” that is needed only to qualify a certain design and is not seen as a quality control test. Therefore the test report often doesn’t include a temperature rise test. In this case, it is mentioned that this test was carried out on an identical transformer with proper references. Temperature rise tests carried out in accordance with IEC practices normally refer to a simple temperature model to describe the temperature differences within the transformer tank. This method is fully described in the IEC Loading Guide (publication 60076-7). This calculation method is normally included in the temperature rise test report. The calculation method is based on the temperature difference (Gr or temperature gradient) between average winding and average oil. This difference is then multiplied by a “hot-spot factor” (H) and applied to the top oil value. The temperature difference Gr between average winding and average oil can usually be determined from temperature rise test with the following steps: • Search for test results at full load on the top cooling mode. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-33 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide • Search for the average winding temperature rise. These values are normally calculated for both primary and secondary windings. The average winding temperature rise is a contractual value, usually specified to not exceed 65 °C above ambient temperature. • The average oil temperature is the average between the top oil and bottom oil temperatures at full losses. • The difference between average winding rise and average oil rise is the average temperature difference “Gr”. The hot-spot factor “H” is dependent on the transformer size, short circuit impedance and winding design, and it should preferably be provided by the manufacturer. It is known to vary from 1.0 to 2.1. However IEC recognizes that 1.1 is a reasonable value for small, distribution-type transformers while 1.3 is fairly common for larger units. The latter value provides a more conservative hot-spot temperature and can be used as a default value when this method is used. An IEC Thermal Diagram is presented in Figure C-33 on page C-34. Figure C-33 - IEC Thermal Diagram (Adapted for Configuration Purpose) C-34 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration In Figure C-33 on page C-34... • A represents the top of the tank (where the top oil temperature is measured in the oil well). • B represents the top of the winding (the oil coming out of the winding is assumed to be at the same temperature as the top oil). • C represents the average oil in the tank and average winding. • D represents the bottom of the winding (the oil temperature is assumed to be the same as the oil coming out of the coolers). • E represents the bottom of the tank. • Gr represents the average winding-to-oil temperature gradient at rated current. • H represents the hot-spot factor. • P represents the hot-spot temperature. • Q represents the average winding temperature (determined by resistance measurement). • X axis represents the temperature. • Y axis represents the relative positions. • Black squares represent measured points. • Black circles represent calculated points. D) Winding Temperature Indicator Most of the time, transformers are provided with a top oil temperature indicator and a winding temperature indicator. The latter is intended to indicate the temperature of the hottest part of the hottest winding. The winding temperature indicator is calibrated during the temperature rise test to reflect at full load the “rated winding hot-spot rise above top oil”. The temperature difference between the two indicators gives the current Hot-Spot Rise. If the transformer is currently operating at full load, the difference between the two temperature indicators could be used for configuration. If the transformer is loaded at any other load level, the rated hot-spot rise above top oil can be calculated as follows: Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-35 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide The value of the winding exponent “m” is discussed in item 2 on page C-31. Note that this usage of the temperature indicators is always risky as they are known for poor accuracy and drifting with time. However it is sometimes the best mean available to calculate an initial value for the winding rated hot-spot temperature rise. It has the advantage for the user that the Winding Hot-Spot Temperature model (Chapter 7) automatically shows the same value as the traditional winding temperature indicator. E) IEC Typical Values In the IEC Loading Guide, some “typical values” for winding hot-spot temperature rise above top oil are mentioned (Annex E in IEC 60076-7) and can be used as default values if no better information is available: • Cooling modes ONAN and ONAF: 26 • Cooling modes beginning with “OF”: 22 • Cooling modes beginning with “OD”: 29 F) Limit Values If everything else fails, it is conservative to use the maximum values allowed in the IEC and IEEE standards. In most cases, this method provides pessimistic values and a hot-spot temperature higher than the true value. These limit values vary depending on the type of paper and the rated temperature leading to “rated aging rate”. Please refer to Section C.3.5 on page C-37 for a discussion on the various types of paper. For transformers built according to IEC rules, the winding hot-spot temperature at rated load should not exceed 98 °C; with a rated ambient temperature of 20 °C, this leads to a winding hot-spot temperature rise of 78 °C (in regard to ambient temperature). 78 minus the rated top oil rise provides the winding hot-spot temperature rise above top oil. The IEEE specifies that for thermally-upgraded paper, the winding hot-spot rise (in regard to ambient temperature) should not exceed 80 °C. This temperature rise of 80 °C minus the rated top oil rise provides the winding hot-spot temperature rise above top oil. Older transformers built according to the IEEE (25-year-old or more) are usually indicated to have an average winding rise of 55 °C (instead of 65 °C). It is an indication that they were manufactured with normal Kraft paper and in this case the maximum allowed winding C-36 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration hot-spot rise is 65 °C. This temperature rise of 65 °C minus the rated top oil rise provides the winding hot-spot temperature rise above top oil. Note: The additional parameters Rated Current on winding H, X and Y are to be configured in the Winding Current Setup (see Section C.3.2 on page C-28). C.3.5 Insulation Aging Setup Selecting Insulation Aging Setup in Figure C-26 on page C-25 or Figure C-27 on page C-26 displays the panel shown in Figure C-34 on page C-37. Figure C-34 - Insulation Aging Setup Panel 1. Aging Calculation Method and Type of Paper The Insulation Aging model (Chapter 8) computes the cumulative deterioration of the winding insulation as a function of time, temperature, moisture content in paper and oxygen content in oil. Papers used for transformer insulation are not all the same and the aging agents affect them with various degrees. Several calculation methods (circle No. 1) using the related type of paper are available in the Device and a selection must be made among those in Table C-3 on page C-38. The average winding temperature rise is always mentioned on the nameplate but it must be interpreted differently depending whether it is constructed according to IEC or IEEE rules. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-37 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide Table C-3 - Rated Hot-spot Temperature for Normal Aging Aging Calculation Method Type of Paper Rated Hot-spot Temperature for Normal Aging IEEE 55 °C rise Kraft paper 95 °C IEEE 65 °C rise Thermally-upgraded paper 110 °C IEC 65 °C rise Kraft paper 98 °C Nomex aging Aramid paper 188 °C Here is a set of rules of thumb that can be helpful if the type of paper is not known: • Transformers manufactured in North America can be assumed to follow IEEE rules. Transformers built elsewhere can be assumed to follow IEC rules. • Transformers manufactured in North America and having an average winding temperature rise of 65 °C should be configured as IEEE 65 °C. • Transformers built outside North America should be configured as IEC 65 °C. • However a transformer built outside north America with a 65 °C average winding rise, but with some indication in documentation (or from User recollection) that it has been specified with thermally-upgraded paper, should be configured as IEEE 65 °C. • Transformers manufactured before 1975 can be assumed to use normal Kraft paper and the average winding temperature rise (mentioned on the nameplate) is normally 55 °C. • Transformers that have a 55 °C rating and a 65 °C rating belong to the transition period where thermally-upgraded paper was introduced but user had only limited confidence. These transformers should be configured as IEEE 65 °C. 2. Previous Aging Most utilities prefer to set this value at 0 day (circle No. 2). This means that only aging occurring after the system commissioning is shown on the aging page. Calculation of previous aging is always an approximation and usually based on calculation of the typical winding temperature for each month of a typical year; this entails a significant error margin. C-38 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration 3. Default moisture content in winding paper In the Hydran M2, the configured value is not used since there is always a moisture sensor and the Winding Hot-Spot Temperature model (Chapter 7) that calculate the moisture content in the winding insulation. In the Intellix MO150, the default moisture content value (circle No. 3) is used if no moisture-in-oil measurement is available. If no information is available, a default value of 1 % can be used as a typical value for a fairly dry transformer. A default value of 0.5 % represents a perfectly dry transformer and can be used if the aging is to be computed without accounting for moisture content. 4. Oil preservation system Three selections are available (circle No. 4): • Sealed tank (with some space at the top of the tank filled with nitrogen) • Conservator with membrane (thus preventing contact between air and oil) • Conservator with free breathing (allowing contact between air and oil) This information in not usually available from the test report or transformer nameplate. It would be available from the transformer specification or transformer Maintenance Manual. On-site observation of the transformer allows seeing if an oil conservator is present; however it does not usually indicate whether a membrane is provided. If no information is available, configure as “Conservator with free breathing” as it is the most pessimistic figure and will give conservative aging value. 5. Previous Service Time Most utilities prefer to set this value at 0 day (circle No. 5), to be consistent if Previous Aging is set at 0 day also. The Previous Service Time indicates how long the transformer has been in service. It provides a more complete picture of the transformer history on the main window for the Insulation Aging model (Figure 8-2 on page 8-5). C.3.6 Moisture and Bubbling Setup Selecting Moisture and Bubbling Setup in Figure C-26 on page C-25 or Figure C-27 on page C-26 displays the panel shown in Figure C-35 on page C-40. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-39 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide Figure C-35 - Moisture and Bubbling Setup Panel 1. Height of Oil above the Hot-Spot area This value (circle No. 1) is a correction factor in the calculation of the bubbling temperature. It is not very critical; if no transformer drawings are available, this parameter can be approximated with the conservative values presented in Table C-4 on page C-40. Table C-4 - Height of Oil Above the Hot-spot Area Rated Power (MVA) Conservator Type Sealed-Tank Type 20–50 1.5 m 0.5 m 51–100 2m 1m 101–200 2.5 m 1.2 m 3m 1.5 m 201 and above Other parameters can be configured in the Moisture Reading Setup (see Section C.3.1 on page C-26): • Type of oil: Select between Naphthenic, Aromatic, Silicon, Natural Ester and User Defined. The type of oil most commonly used is Naphthenic and should be used as default if no specific information is available. • Standard Temperature for RH%: This is a reference value used by some utilities to compare actual condition with some reference value. The most common value is 20 °C. C.3.7 Moisture Content in Barrier Setup Selecting Moisture Content in Barrier Setup in Figure C-26 on page C-25 or Figure C-27 on page C-26 displays the panel shown in Figure C-36 on page C-41. C-40 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration Figure C-36 - Moisture Content in Barrier Setup Panel 1. Altitude of the transformer This value (circle No. 1) makes a significant change only above 1,000 meters. An approximate figure is adequate and a default value of 500 meters is conservative in most cases. 2. Load Losses on Top Cooling Stage In all models related to winding temperature, it is the ratio of Load Losses over No-Load Losses that is significant. A default value of 5 is a good approximation in most cases. This can be achieved by setting Load Losses at 100 kW and No-Load Losses at 20 kW. An accurate parameter (circle No. 2) is to be found in the test report as it is systematically measured on each transformer and compared with the guaranteed value. If the transformer Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-41 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide has a tap changer, the value for mid-tap position is used. This value is usually corrected for the standard temperature of 75 °C. 3. No Load Losses at Rated Voltage In all models related to winding temperature, it is the ratio of Load Losses over No-Load Losses that is significant. A default value of 5 is a good approximation in most cases. This can be achieved by setting Load Losses at 100 kW and No-Load Losses at 20 kW. An accurate parameter (circle No. 3) is to be found in the test report as it is systematically measured on each transformer and compared with the guaranteed value. No-Load Losses are usually measured at several different voltages. The value corresponding to the rated voltage is used. 4. Rated Power at Cooling Stage 0, 1 and 2 This is an important parameter (circle No. 4) and the default values should not be used. Most transformers come with triple ratings which usually increase in the following proportion: 60 / 80 / 100 MVA. This is the most essential characteristic of a transformer and it can be found on the transformer nameplate, in the test report or in the specifications. 5. Oil Exponent at Cooling Stage 0, 1 and 2 These values are not usually available in the test report unless temperature rise tests have been carried at several different load levels. It is therefore acceptable to use the default values (circle No. 5) corresponding to the cooling mode on each cooling stage and presented in Table C-5 on page C-42. Table C-5 - Oil Exponent at Cooling Stages Cooling Mode C-42 IEEE Oil Exponent IEC Oil Exponent ONAN 0.8 0.8 ONAF 0.9 0.8 Beginning with “OF” 0.9 1 Beginning with “OD” 1 1 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration 6. Rated Top Oil Rise at Cooling Stage 0, 1 and 2 This is an important parameter (circle No. 6) and the default values should not be used. The following methods (in descending order of preference) can be applied to find this value: A) Temperature Rise Test Report These values are to be found in the test report in the section “Temperature Rise Test.” In the first part of a temperature rise test, one winding is short-circuited and from the other winding a current is circulated in the transformer. The current is above the rated value by a small amount to compensate for the absence of no-load losses in this test condition. With the full losses injected in the transformer, all temperatures are recorded until the top oil temperature reaches a stable condition. Beware that the recorded value might be corrected in the report, to adjust for the proper value of the total losses. The corrected value should be used. Usually, the temperature rise tests are carried out only on the top cooling stage (stage 2) and the minimum cooling stage (stage 0). The top oil rise for stage 1 can be made equal to the average between stages 0 and 2. Sometimes, the temperature rise test is available only for stage 2; this value is then to be used for all stages. B) Oil Temperature Indicator If no temperature rise test is available, the current top oil temperature condition can be assumed to be “normal” and the rated value for the top oil temperature rise can be derived from this reading. This method of benchmarking will allow detection of any further degradation of the cooling system. The rated top oil rise is calculated as follows: Where: • R = ratio of Load Losses / No-Load Losses • K = ratio of Current Load / Rated Load • n = Oil Exponent Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-43 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide C) IEC Default Values In the IEC Loading Guide, some “typical values” for typical top oil temperature rise at rated load are mentioned (Annex E in IEC 60076-7) and can be used as default values if no better information is available: • Cooling modes ONAN and ONAF: 52 • Cooling modes beginning with “OF”: 56 • Cooling modes beginning with “OD”: 49 7. Rated Bottom Oil Rise at Cooling Stage 0, 1 and 2 These values (circle No. 7) are to be found in the test report in section “Temperature Rise Test.” The oil entering the lower part of a winding is assumed to be at the same temperature as the bottom of the coolers. This latter value is recorded every hour during the temperature rise test. At the end of the test at full losses, the rated bottom oil temperature is recorded at the same time as the rated top oil temperature. The rated bottom oil temperature is usually the average value of the bottom temperatures on several coolers. Beware that the recorded value might be corrected in the report, to adjust for the proper value of the total losses. The corrected value should be used. Usually, the temperature rise tests are carried out only on the top cooling stage (stage 2) and the minimum cooling stage (stage 0). The bottom oil rise for stage 1 can be made equal to the average between stages 0 and 2. Sometimes, the temperature rise test is available only for stage 2; this value is then to be used for all stages. If no temperature rise test is available, the following conservative value of temperature difference between the top oil and bottom oil can be applied for each cooling stage: • Cooling modes ONAN and ONAF: 18 °C • Cooling modes beginning with “OF”: 20 °C • Cooling modes beginning with “OD”: 6 °C C-44 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration C.3.8 Cooling Efficiency Setup Selecting the Cooling Efficiency Setup displays the panel shown in Figure C-37 on page C-45. Figure C-37 - Cooling Efficiency Setup Panel Note: This panel is dynamically created according to the type and number of analog inputs defined in Section C.1 on page C-1. This panel shows up only if an ambient temperature reading is available. The number of stages is adjusted with the number of cooling banks configured in the Cooling Bank Status Setup (Section C.3.9 on page C-49). Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-45 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide 1. Altitude of the transformer This value (circle No. 1) makes a significant change only above 1,000 meters. An approximate figure is adequate and a default value of 500 meters is conservative in most cases. 2. Rated Top Oil Time Constant The rated top oil time constant is the time it takes to reach 63 % of the final temperature increase when a step load is applied on a transformer previously at the ambient temperature. In some cases, this value (circle No. 2) can be extracted from the heat run test result. It can also be calculated as indicated in the IEEE Loading Guide C57.91 (1995). In normal operation, this parameter is not critical for cooling efficiency monitoring. The following default values can be used for the top oil time constant based on the cooling mode applicable on the top cooling stage: • Cooling mode ONAN: 3.5 hours • Cooling mode ONAF: 2.5 hours • Cooling modes beginning with “OF” and “OD”: 1.5 hours 3. Cooling Efficiency Averaging Period The default value of 1,440 minutes (one day) appears to be adequate in all cases (circle No. 3). 4. Load Losses on Top Cooling Stage In all models related to winding temperature, it is the ratio of Load Losses over No-Load Losses that is significant. A default value of 5 is a good approximation in most cases. This can be achieved by setting Load Losses at 100 kW and No-Load Losses at 20 kW. An accurate parameter (circle No. 4) is to be found in the test report as it is systematically measured on each transformer and compared with the guaranteed value. Load losses are some time designated as “Short Circuit Losses.” If the transformer has a tap changer, the value for mid-tap position is used. This value is usually corrected for the standard temperature of 75 °C. C-46 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration 5. No Load Losses at Rated Voltage In all models related to winding temperature, it is the ratio of Load Losses over No-Load Losses that is significant. A default value of 5 is a good approximation in most cases. This can be achieved by setting Load Losses at 100 kW and No-Load Losses at 20 kW. An accurate parameter (circle No. 5) is to be found in the test report as it is systematically measured on each transformer and compared with the guaranteed value. No-Load Losses are usually measured at several different voltages. The value corresponding to the rated voltage is used. 6. Rated Power at Cooling Stage 0, 1 and 2 This is an important parameter (circle No. 6) and the default values should not be used. Most transformers come with triple ratings which usually increase in the following proportion: 60 / 80 / 100 MVA. This is the most essential characteristic of a transformer and it can be found on the transformer nameplate, in the test report or in the specifications. 7. Oil Exponent at Cooling Stage 0, 1 and 2 These values are not usually available in the test report unless temperature rise tests have been carried at several different load levels. It is therefore acceptable to use the default values (circle No. 7) corresponding to the cooling mode on each cooling stage and presented in Table C-5 on page C-42. 8. Rated Top Oil Rise at Cooling Stage 0, 1 and 2 This is an important parameter (circle No. 8) and the default values should not be used. The following methods (in descending order of preference) can be applied to find this value: A) Temperature Rise Test Report These values are to be found in the test report in the section “Temperature Rise Test.” In the first part of a temperature rise test, one winding is short-circuited and from the other winding a current is circulated in the transformer. The current is above the rated value by a small amount to compensate for the absence of no-load losses in this test condition. With the full losses injected in the transformer, all temperatures are recorded until the top oil temperature reaches a stable condition. Beware that the recorded value might be corrected Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-47 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide in the report, to adjust for the proper value of the total losses. The corrected value should be used. Usually, the temperature rise tests are carried out only on the top cooling stage (stage 2) and the minimum cooling stage (stage 0). The top oil rise for stage 1 can be made equal to the average between stages 0 and 2. Sometimes, the temperature rise test is available only for stage 2; this value is then to be used for all stages. B) Oil Temperature Indicator If no temperature rise test is available, the current top oil temperature condition can be assumed to be “normal” and the rated value for the top oil temperature rise can be derived from this reading. This method of benchmarking will allow detection of any further degradation of the cooling system. The rated top oil rise is calculated as follows: Where: • R = ratio of Load Losses / No-Load Losses • K = ratio of Current Load / Rated Load • n = Oil Exponent C) IEC Default Values In the IEC Loading Guide, some “typical values” for typical top oil temperature rise at rated load are mentioned (Annex E in IEC 60076-7) and can be used as default values if no better information is available: • Cooling modes ONAN and ONAF: 52 • Cooling modes beginning with “OF”: 56 • Cooling modes beginning with “OD”: 49 C-48 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration C.3.9 Cooling Banks Status Setup Selecting Cooling Bank Status Setup in Figure C-26 on page C-25 or Figure C-27 on page C-26 displays the panel shown in Figure C-38 on page C-49. Figure C-38 - Cooling Banks Status Setup Panel 1. Number of Banks The number of banks being controlled (circle No. 1) is by definition the number of cooling stages minus one. This is found on the transformer nameplate. 2. Cooling Status Source Input On the Hydran M2, there is only one source acceptable: the digital signal (circle No. 2) from the cooling banks 1 and 2. On the Intellix MO150, the method to monitor the cooling status can be the digital signal or the current signal. 3. Altitude of the transformer This value (circle No. 3) makes a significant change only above 1,000 meters. An approximate figure is adequate and a default value of 500 meters is conservative in most cases. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-49 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide 4. Type of Cooling for Stage 0, 1 and 2 This information on the cooling mode (circle No. 4) is found on the transformer nameplate and in the test report. Beware that older transformers may be rated with the old IEEE designation and must be converted as indicated in Table C-6 on page C-50. Table C-6 - Converted Designation for Cooling Modes Old IEEE Designation Current IEC / IEEE Designation OA ONAN OW ONWF FA ONAF FOA OFAF FOW OFWF C.3.10 Cooling Control Choosing Cooling Control in Figure C-27 on page C-26 displays the panel shown in Figure C-39 on page C-50. Figure C-39 - Cooling Control Setup Panel Note: The Cooling Control model (Chapter 13) is applicable only on the Intellix MO150. For the Hydran M2, please refer to Section C.3.9 on page C-49. C-50 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration 1. Cooling Model Enabled This box (circle No. 1) should be checked [] to initiate the operation of the model. 2. Maximum Bank Inactivity Even if the transformer is operating at light load, it is good practice to operate each cooling bank at some interval to ensure they are ready for service. By default, this time period (circle No. 2) can be set at 30 days. 3. Minimum Bank Activity It is good practice to let the cooling bank run for at least a few minutes once it has started. This duration (circle No. 3) can be set by default at 1 minute. 4. Cooling Delay Between Stage 1 and Stage 2 In case of sudden load increase of high magnitude, simultaneous starting of both cooling banks should be avoided because of the high inrush current resulting. A delay (circle No. 4) of at least 15 seconds is advisable. 5. Cooling duty sharing for Bank 1 Cooling stage 1 can be provided by activating either cooling bank 1 or 2. Depending on the operating practices of the transformer owner, the entire burden can be placed on one cooling bank, thus resulting on an earlier wear of those fans. Alternatively the burden can be shared between the two cooling banks, thus postponing maintenance activity but calling for larger intervention and possibly unavailability of the transformer. In absence of guidance, the duty sharing (circle No. 5) can be set at 50 % to result in equal sharing of wear. 6. Cooling Bank 1 and Bank 2 Available If one cooling bank is unavailable (because of maintenance), it should be indicated by unchecking [ ] the box (circle No. 6), thus avoiding false alarms. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-51 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide In the Cooling Control menu shown in Figure C-40 on page C-52, three different activation parameters can be configured: • Load Current Input: See Section C.3.10.1 on page C-52. • Top Oil Input: See Section C.3.10.2 on page C-54. • Winding Hot-Spot Input: See Section C.3.10.3 on page C-55. Figure C-40 - Cooling Control Menu C.3.10.1 Load Current Input In the Cooling Control menu (Figure C-40 on page C-52), choosing the Load Current Input displays the panel shown in Figure C-41 on page C-53. 7. Cooling Enabled by Load Current Unless advised otherwise by the utility, this variable is usually used to control the cooling and this box (circle No. 7) should be checked []. C-52 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration Figure C-41 - Load Current Input Panel 8. Cooling Load Current Dead Band A dead band is essential to avoid repeated starting and stopping of the cooling system. Once initiated, the cooling bank runs until the load current falls below the set point minus the dead band. The dead band (circle No. 8) is expressed in p.u. of the rated current. A default value of 0.02 p.u. is acceptable in most cases (2 % of the rated current). 9. Cooling Load Current Stage 1 and Stage 2 Set Point The set points for starting the cooling stages 1 and 2 should be selected by the transformer owner. The default values for starting the cooling stages 1 and 2 (circles No. 9) are 0.500 and 0.750 p.u. respectively (50 % and 75 % of the rated current on the top cooling stage). 10. Cooling Load Current Stage 1 and Stage 2 On and Off Delay A delay can be introduced in the control sequence for the cooling stages 1 and 2. This is used mainly for applications with rapidly varying load current. The default value (circles No. 10) is 0 minute. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-53 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide C.3.10.2 Top Oil Input In the Cooling Control menu (Figure C-40 on page C-52), choosing the Top Oil Input displays the panel shown in Figure C-42 on page C-54. Figure C-42 - Top Oil Input Panel 11. Cooling Enabled by Top Oil Temperature Unless advised otherwise by the utility, this variable is usually used to control the cooling and this box (circle No. 11) should be checked []. 12. Cooling Top Oil Temperature Dead Band A dead band is essential to avoid repeated starting and stopping of the cooling system. Once initiated, the cooling bank runs until the top oil temperature falls below the set point minus the dead band. A dead band of 5 °C (circle No. 12) is often used for the top oil temperature. 13. Cooling Top Oil Temperature Stage 1 and Stage 2 Set Point The set points for starting the cooling stages 1 and 2 should be selected by the transformer owner. The default values for the top oil temperature for starting the cooling stages 1 and 2 (circles No. 13) are 55 and 65 °C respectively. C-54 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration 14. Cooling Top Oil Temperature Stage 1 and Stage 2 On and Off Delay A delay can be introduced in the control sequence for the cooling stages 1 and 2. This is seldom used for top oil temperature as it evolves slowly by nature. The default value (circles No. 14) is 0 minute. C.3.10.3 Winding Hot-Spot Input In the Cooling Control menu (Figure C-40 on page C-52), choosing the Winding Hot-Spot Input displays the panel shown in Figure C-43 on page C-55. Figure C-43 - Winding Hot-Spot Input Panel 15. Cooling Enabled by Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Unless advised otherwise by the utility, this variable is usually used to control the cooling and this box (circle No. 15) should be checked []. 16. Cooling Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Dead Band A dead band is essential to avoid repeated starting and stopping of the cooling system. Once initiated, the cooling bank runs until the winding hot-spot temperature falls below the set point minus the dead band. A dead band of 5 °C (circle No. 16) is often used for the winding hot-spot temperature. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-55 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide 17. Cooling Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Stage 1 and Stage 2 Set Point The set points for starting the cooling stages 1 and 2 should be selected by the transformer owner. The default values for the winding hot-spot temperature for starting the cooling stages 1 and 2 (circles No. 17) are 65 and 75 °C respectively. 18. Cooling Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Stage 1 and Stage 2 On and Off Delay A delay can be introduced in the control sequence for the cooling stages 1 and 2. This is mainly for applications with rapidly varying load current. The default value (circles No. 18) is 0 minute. C.3.11 Tap Position Tracking Setup Selecting the Tap Position Tracking Setup displays the panel shown in Figure C-44 on page C-56. Figure C-44 - Tap Position Tracking Setup Panel 1. Middle Position This value (circle No. 1) indicates at which tap the voltage is at the rated value on both primary and secondary sides. It is usually at the middle position (tap 9 on a tap changer with 17 positions). This information can be found on the transformer nameplate. 2. Through Positions On most tap changers, the manufacturer provides the potentiometer that generates a voltage proportional to the tap position. The standard potentiometer has typically 10- resistors between the contacts. Usually, the multiposition switch is equipped with jumpers (instead C-56 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration of resistors) in the “Through Positions” where the tap position indicator stays only momentarily during the operation of the reversing switch. In this case the potentiometer provides an indication of the “electrical position” of the tap changer. The number of Through Positions to be configured (circle No. 2) is 0. When no potentiometer is available, a position transducer has to be provided. The tap changer driving mechanisms are always provided with a visual tap position indicator. A position transducer, driven by the visual indicator shaft (also called Geneva shaft), provides a 4–20 mA signal that is proportional to the tap changer’s “mechanical position.” It is assumed that the Geneva shaft rotates by a fixed value for each step on the transducer. The signal from the Geneva shaft position transducer is read at regular intervals and it is noted and analyzed to determine the actual position of the visual position indicator. This value indicates the number of mechanical positions that will be crossed when the tap changer goes through the neutral position. The number of Through Positions is not usually found on the transformer nameplate and the information has to be extracted from the tap changer Instruction Manual. 3. Tap Position Polarity This information is found on the transformer nameplate or in the transformer specification. It corresponds to the user preference about tap position designation. Table C-7 on page C-57 indicates the designations that are provided for each Tap Position Polarity available in the drop-down list (circle No. 3). Table C-7 - Tap Position Designations Tap Position Polarity 4. Tap Position Designation for a Tap Changer With 17 Positions Absolute 1, 2, 3, ..., 8, 9, 10, ..., 15, 16, 17 Absolute reverse 17, 16, 15, ..., 10, 9, 8, ..., 3, 2, 1 Bipolar L8, L7, L6, ..., L2, L1, 0, R1, R2, ..., R7, R8 Bipolar reverse R8, R7, R6, ..., R2, R1, 0, L1, L2, ..., L7, L8 Tap Position Units (-/+) This information (circle No. 4) is found on the transformer nameplate or in the transformer specification. It can be L, R for Lower and Rise (or the equivalent in a different language), Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-57 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide or - +. If Absolute is selected in the Tap Position Polarity drop-down list, then the Tap Position Units (-/+) become irrelevant (in the Intellix MO150, this field actually disappears). 5. Real Tap Position Count and Actual Tap Position They are not settings, but a display of the actual value of the real tap position count and the actual tap position (circle No. 5). These values are not displayed on the Intellix MO150. C.3.12 OLTC Temperature Setup Selecting OLTC Temperature Setup in Figure C-27 on page C-26 displays the panel shown in Figure C-45 on page C-58. Figure C-45 - OLTC Temperature Setup Panel 1. Short Term Period The OLTC Temperature Setup model monitors the temperature difference between the transformer main tank and the tap changer tank. This value needs to be averaged over a certain period to eliminate the variations caused by the sunshine and rain. The default value of 60 minutes is adequate in most cases (circle No. 1). It could be adjusted later depending on particular conditions. 2. Long Term Period The default value of 24 hours is adequate in most cases (circle No. 2). It could be adjusted later depending on particular conditions. C-58 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration C.3.13 Dynamic Loading Setup Selecting Dynamic Loading Setup in Figure C-26 on page C-25 or Figure C-27 on page C-26 displays the window shown in Figure C-46 on page C-59. Figure C-46 - Dynamic Loading Model Setup Window On the right side, there are groups of parameters that can be configured: • Dynamic Loading Setup: See Section C.3.13.1 on page C-60. • Accessories Characteristics: See Section C.3.13.2 on page C-64. • Overload Limits: See Section C.3.13.3 on page C-65. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-59 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide C.3.13.1 Group 1: Dynamic Loading Setup The first group of parameters in the Dynamic Loading Setup window is shown in Figure C-47 on page C-60. Figure C-47 - Group 1: Dynamic Loading Setup Panel 1. Transformer Tag This field (circle No. 1) is used for description purpose only and is displayed in the model graphical representation. 2. Top Cooling Stage This value (circle No. 2) is displayed only and is based on the Number of Banks selected in Figure C-38 on page C-49: • The value is 0 if Number of Banks is set to None. • The value is 1 if Number of Banks is set to 1 Banks. • The value is 2 if Number of Banks is set to 2 Banks. C-60 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration 3. Rated Power at Cooling Stage 0, 1 and 2 This is an important parameter (circle No. 3) and the default values should not be used. Most transformers come with triple ratings which usually increase in the following proportion: 60 / 80 / 100 MVA. This is the most essential characteristic of a transformer and it can be found on the transformer nameplate, in the test report or in the specifications. 4. Rated Top Oil Rise at Cooling Stage 0, 1 and 2 This is an important parameter (circle No. 4) and the default values should not be used. The following methods (in descending order of preference) can be applied to find this value: A) Temperature Rise Test Report These values are to be found in the test report in the section “Temperature Rise Test.” In the first part of a temperature rise test, one winding is short-circuited and from the other winding a current is circulated in the transformer. The current is above the rated value by a small amount to compensate for the absence of no-load losses in this test condition. With the full losses injected in the transformer, all temperatures are recorded until the top oil temperature reaches a stable condition. Beware that the recorded value might be corrected in the report, to adjust for the proper value of the total losses. The corrected value should be used. Usually, the temperature rise tests are carried out only on the top cooling stage (stage 2) and the minimum cooling stage (stage 0). The top oil rise for stage 1 can be made equal to the average between stages 0 and 2. Sometimes, the temperature rise test is available only for stage 2; this value is then to be used for all stages. B) Oil Temperature Indicator If no temperature rise test is available, the current top oil temperature condition can be assumed to be “normal” and the rated value for the top oil temperature rise can be derived from this reading. This method of benchmarking will allow detection of any further degradation of the cooling system. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-61 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide The rated top oil rise is calculated as follows: Where: • R = ratio of Load Losses / No-Load Losses • K = ratio of Current Load / Rated Load • n = Oil Exponent C) IEC Default Values In the IEC Loading Guide, some “typical values” for typical top oil temperature rise at rated load are mentioned (Annex E in IEC 60076-7) and can be used as default values if no better information is available: • Cooling modes ONAN and ONAF: 52 • Cooling modes beginning with “OF”: 56 • Cooling modes beginning with “OD”: 49 5. Oil Exponent at Cooling Stage 0, 1 and 2 These values are not usually available in the test report unless temperature rise tests have been carried at several different load levels. It is therefore acceptable to use the default values (circle No. 5) corresponding to the cooling mode on each cooling stage and presented in Table C-5 on page C-42. 6. Rated Top Oil Time Constant The rated top oil time constant is the time it takes to reach 63 % of the final temperature increase when a step load is applied on a transformer previously at the ambient temperature. In some cases, this value (circle No. 6) can be extracted from the heat run test result. It can also be calculated as indicated in the IEEE Loading Guide C57.91 (1995). C-62 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration In normal operation, this parameter is not critical for cooling efficiency monitoring. The following default values can be used for the top oil time constant based on the cooling mode applicable on the top cooling stage: • Cooling mode ONAN: 3.5 hours • Cooling mode ONAF: 2.5 hours • Cooling modes beginning with “OF” and “OD”: 1.5 hours 7. Load Losses on Top Cooling Stage In all models related to winding temperature, it is the ratio of Load Losses over No-Load Losses that is significant. A default value of 5 is a good approximation in most cases. This can be achieved by setting Load Losses at 100 kW and No-Load Losses at 20 kW. An accurate parameter (circle No. 7) is to be found in the test report as it is systematically measured on each transformer and compared with the guaranteed value. Load losses are some time designated as “Short Circuit Losses.” If the transformer has a tap changer, the value for mid-tap position is used. This value is usually corrected for the standard temperature of 75 °C. 8. No Load Losses at Rated Voltage In all models related to winding temperature, it is the ratio of Load Losses over No-Load Losses that is significant. A default value of 5 is a good approximation in most cases. This can be achieved by setting Load Losses at 100 kW and No-Load Losses at 20 kW. An accurate parameter (circle No. 8) is to be found in the test report as it is systematically measured on each transformer and compared with the guaranteed value. No-Load Losses are usually measured at several different voltages. The value corresponding to the rated voltage is used. 9. User estimated Water content in Winding insulation Paper (in the area of the hottest spot) This parameter (circle No. 9) is used by the Bubbling calculation formula for a given (steady load) that is part of the Dynamic Loading overall computation algorithm. For this version of the Dynamic Loading model, a manual input of this value is used. The range is 0.1–10 % w/w and the default value is 0.5 % w/w. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-63 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide C.3.13.2 Group 2: Accessories Characteristics The second group of parameters in the Dynamic Loading Setup window is shown in Figure C-48 on page C-64. Figure C-48 - Group 2: Accessories Characteristics Setup Panel 10. Rated continuous Current on HV Bushing This numeric value (circle No. 10) is needed by the Dynamic Loading model and provided by the bushing manufacturer. The range is 10–1,000 p.u. and the default value is 100 p.u. 11. Rated continuous Current on LV Bushing This numeric value (circle No. 11) is needed by the Dynamic Loading model and provided by the bushing manufacturer. The range is 10–10,000 p.u. and the default value is 1,000 p.u. 12. Rated continuous Current on HV Winding This numeric value (circle No. 12) is needed by the Dynamic Loading model and provided by the bushing manufacturer. The range is 10–1,000 p.u. and the default value is 100 p.u. 13. Rated continuous Current on LV Winding This numeric value (circle No. 13) is needed by the Dynamic Loading model and provided by the bushing manufacturer. The range is 10–10,000 p.u. and the default value is 1,000 p.u. C-64 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration 14. Rated continuous Current of OLTC This numeric value (circle No. 14) is needed by the Dynamic Loading model and provided by the OLTC manufacturer. The range is 10–10,000 p.u. and the default value is 1,000 p.u. 15. Rated continuous Current of OLTC Winding This numeric value (circle No. 15) is needed by the Dynamic Loading model and provided by the OLTC manufacturer. The range is 10–10,000 p.u. and the default value is 1,000 p.u. C.3.13.3 Group 3: Overload Limits The last group of parameters in the Dynamic Loading Setup window is shown in Figure C-49 on page C-65. Figure C-49 - Group 3: Overload Limits Setup Panel 16. Maximum Load of the HV Bushings This numeric value (circle No. 16) is used to stop the Dynamic Loading computation in case the computed HV Bushing Load value exceeds this one. The HV bushings usually have a larger current rating than the HV winding. However, the User may wish to limit further the acceptable load factor on the HV bushing because of shorter time constant, suspicious conditions or other reasons. The range is 0.5–2.0 p.u. and the default value is 1.5 p.u. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-65 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide 17. Maximum Load of the LV Bushings This numeric value (circle No. 17) is used to stop the Dynamic Loading computation in case the computed LV Bushing Load value exceeds this one. The LV bushings usually have a larger current rating than the LV winding. However, the User may wish to limit further the acceptable load factor on the LV bushing because of shorter time constant, suspicious conditions or other reasons. The range is 0.5–2.0 p.u. and the default value is 1.5 p.u. 18. Maximum Load of the Tap changer (OLTC) This numeric value (circle No. 18) is used to stop the Dynamic Loading computation in case the computed OLTC Load value exceeds this one. The OLTC’s usually have a larger current rating than the winding where they are connected. However, the User may wish to limit differently the overload factor depending on the tap changer conditions. The range is 0.5–2.0 p.u. and the default value is 1.5 p.u. 19. Maximum Top Oil Temperature This numeric value (circle No. 19) is used to stop the Dynamic Loading computation in case the computed Top Oil Temperature value exceeds this one. During overloads, the top oil temperature must be limited if excessive oxidation and risk of oil overflow are to be avoided. The range is -75 to +200 °C and the default value is 80 °C. 20. Maximum Hot Spot Temperature This numeric value (circle No. 20) is used to stop the Dynamic Loading computation in case the computed Winding Hot Spot Temperature value exceeds this one. The winding hot-spot temperature is usually considered the most important factor to be used in transformer overloading. Beyond 150 °C, the thermal degradation rate increases rapidly and operators usually try to avoid this condition. The range is -75 to +200 °C and the default value is 150 °C. 21. Minimum Bubbling Temperature This numeric value (circle No. 21) is used to stop the Dynamic Loading computation in case the computed Bubbling Temperature Margin value exceeds this one. The bubbling temperature is computed from the water content in the insulating paper. To avoid the risk of bubbling at all times during overload occurrences, a margin must be kept between the C-66 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration Summary bubbling temperature and the actual hot-spot temperature. Many users apply a margin of 20 °C. The range is : 0–40 °C and the default value is 20 °C. C.4 MODELS CONFIGURATION SUMMARY It is advisable to search through the various test reports and fill in Table C-8 on page C-67 before configurating the system. Table C-8 - Models Configuration Summary Configuration Range Customer Configuration Minimum Maximum Default Winding Current Model (Section C.3.2 on page C-28) Transformer type (Transformer or Autotransformer) Rated current on each winding monitored (A) (Rated current on top cooling mode is to be used) H X Y C 1 1 1 1 5,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 250 250 250 250 Number of Phases 1 3 1 H Rated Voltage on each winding (kV) X Y 10 10 3 1,500 1,500 1,500 100 100 100 Apparent Power Model (Section C.3.3 on page C-29) Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Model (Section C.3.4 on page C-30) Transformer type (Transformer or Autotransformer) Winding Exponent 0.5 1 0.8 Winding Time Constant (minutes) 0.1 20 6 Rated Winding Hot-Spot Rise Above H Top Oil (°C) 1 50 30 Insulation Aging Model (Section C.3.5 on page C-37) Aging Calculation Method (designated also as “Type of Paper”) Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-67 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide Configuration Range Customer Configuration Minimum Maximum Default Previous Aging (days) 0 40,000 0 0 40,000 0 0 5 2 0 40 20 10 60 25 Altitude of the Transformer (m) 0 5,000 500 Rated Top Oil Time Constant (hours) 0.5 8 3 Cooling Efficiency Averaging period (minutes) 60 2,880 1,440 Load Losses on Top Cooling Stage (kW) 10 10,000 500 No-Load Losses at Rated Voltage (kW) 2 2,000 100 Default moisture content in winding paper (%) (not to be configured in the Hydran M2) Oil preservation system (Sealed tank, Membrane or Free breathing) Previous Service Time (days) Moisture and Bubbling Model (Section C.3.6 on page C-39) Height of oil above the hot-spot area (m) Type of oil (Naphtaneique, Aromatic, Natural Ester, Silicone or Custom oil) Standard Temperature for RH (°C) Moisture content in Insulating Barrier (Section C.3.7 on page C-40) Rated Bottom Oil Rise on each Cooling Mode (°C) Cooling Efficiency Model (Section C.3.8 on page C-45) C-68 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration Summary Configuration Range Customer Configuration Minimum Maximum Default Rated power on each cooling stage (MVA) Cooling stage 0 Cooling stage 1 Cooling stage 2 1 600 100 Oil Exponent on each Cooling Stage Cooling stage 0 Cooling stage 1 Cooling stage 2 0.5 1 0.8 Rated Top Oil Rise on each Cooling Stage (°C) Cooling stage 0 Cooling stage 1 Cooling stage 2 20 80 55 Cooling Bank Status Model (Section C.3.9 on page C-49) Number of controllable Cooling Banks 0 2 2 Cooling Bank Feedback Input Mode Digital Digital Digital Altitude of transformer (m) 0 5,000 500 Type of cooling on stage 0 Type of cooling on stage 1 Type of cooling on stage 2 (ONAN, ONAF, OFAF, OFWF or Other) ONAN OLTC Position Tracking Model (Section C.3.11 on page C-56) Total number of positions on the tap changer (for page: Plugin #X / Tap Position Input) 0 35 Middle Position Through Positions 17 0 Tap Position Polarity Part 18415 19 8 2 Bipolar Rev. 7, December 2010 C-69 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide Configuration Range Customer Configuration Minimum Maximum Default Tap Position Units -/+ Dynamic Loading Model (Section C.3.13 on page C-59) Rated power on each cooling stage (MVA) Cooling stage 0 Cooling stage 1 Cooling stage 2 1 600 100 Rated Top Oil Rise on each Cooling Stage (°C) Cooling stage 0 Cooling stage 1 Cooling stage 2 20 80 55 Oil Exponent on each Cooling Stage Cooling stage 0 Cooling stage 1 Cooling stage 2 0.5 1 0.8 Rated Top Oil Time Constant (hours) 0.5 8 3 Load Losses on Top Cooling Stage (kW) 10 10,000 500 No-Load Losses at Rated Voltage (kW) 2 2,000 100 User estimate of water content in winding insulation paper (in the area of the hottest spot) (%w/w) 0.1 10 0.5 Rated continuous Current on HV Bushing (p.u.) 10 1,000 100 Rated continuous Current on LV Bushing (p.u.) 10 10,000 1,000 Rated continuous Current on HV Winding (p.u.) 10 1,000 100 C-70 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Models Configuration Summary Configuration Range Customer Configuration Minimum Maximum Default Rated continuous Current on LV Winding (p.u.) 10 10,000 1,000 Rated continuous Current on OLTC (p.u.) 10 10,000 1,000 Rated continuous Current on OLTC Winding (p.u.) 10 10,000 1,000 Maximum Load of the HV Bushings (p.u.) 0.5 2.0 1.5 Maximum Load of the LV Bushings (p.u.) 0.5 2.0 1.5 Maximum Load of the Tap Changer (OLTC) (p.u.) 0.5 2.0 1.5 Maximum Top Oil Temperature (°C) -75 200 80 Maximum Hot-Spot Temperature (°C) -75 200 150 Minimum Bubbling Temperature (°C) 0 40 20 Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 C-71 Appendix C • Models Configuration Guide PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK C-72 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Appendix D Database Upgrade WARNING CAUTION If a previous version (1.2 or 1.3) of the Multi Host software is already installed on your PC, the procedure in this Appendix must be used to install the new version 1.4. Not doing so could result in loss of data and various compatibility problems such as buttons not being visible. This Appendix describes how to upgrade the Multi Host software database from a previous version to the most recent software provided by General Electric Canada. The Multi Host is used for the Hydran M2 and Intellix MO150 Devices. The following information will be transferred: • • • • • Configuration data (substation name, communication, etc.) History data (history of all the configured Devices, etc.) Favorite parameters Display settings Custom model parameters Note: This Multi Host Database Upgrade utility version does not support the Russian version of the Multi Host software. To successfully upgrade the database, the user must: • Have Administrative rights on the PC. • Know the location where the Multi Host software has been installed on the computer. The default folder is C:\Program Files\GE Energy\Multi Host, as shown in Figure 1-6 on page 1-7. • Know the number of the old and new versions of Multi Host installed. In the Help menu select About, and the box shown in Figure 3-79 on page 3-75 indicates the Host Version. Note: The database upgrade is a one-time activity that can be done only one time on the Host and Server PC’s. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 D-1 Appendix D • Database Upgrade D.1 BACKING UP THE DATABASES While uninstalling the old version of the Multi Host application, the user must rename or back up three databases which reside in the installation path of the application: • Host databases: Named TransDB.mdb and HistoryDB.mdb, they can be found in the Database subdirectory where the Multi Host software was installed. The default folder is C:\Program Files\GE Energy\Multi Host\Database, as shown in Figure 1-6 on page 1-7. • Server database: Named GECommServerDB.mdb, it can be found in the Communication Server\Database subdirectory where the Multi Host software was installed. The default folder is C:\Program Files\GE Energy\Multi Host\Communication Server\Database, as shown in Figure 1-6 on page 1-7. 1. Rename the three databases in the XXXXOLD.mdb format. These files must be provided as inputs to the database upgrade tool. 2. To ensure the databases will not be washed away during installation, copy also the databases somewhere else on the computer. This is just prevention in case of a bad operation. D.2 REMOVING THE OLD MULTI HOST AND THE HOST DATABASES Once all three databases have been backed up, proceed as follows: 1. Click Start and move the cursor onto Settings then Control Panel then Add or Remove Programs. 2. Select Multi Host. 3. Click Change/remove. 4. If both the Host application and the Communication Server are installed, click Ok to uninstall the Multi Host application. 5. If only the Communication Server is installed, click Cancel to uninstall the Multi Host application. D-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Installing the Most Recent Multi Host 6. If only the Host application is installed, click Cancel to uninstall the Multi Host application. 7. Though the Multi Host application is uninstalled, the old host database files are retained. Manually delete both host database files TransDB.mdb and HistoryDB.mdb, which can be found in the Database subdirectory where the Multi Host software was installed. The default folder is C:\Program Files\GE Energy\Multi Host\Database, as shown in Figure 1-6 on page 1-7. D.3 INSTALLING THE MOST RECENT MULTI HOST 1. To install the Multi Host application, double-click Setup.exe. 2. In the Select Options box shown in Figure 1-4 on page 1-5: • • • • Check [] Multi Host if only the Host application has to be installed. Check [] Communication Server if only the Server has to be installed. Check [] both options if both have to be installed on the same PC. To continue, click Next >. 3. In the Choose Destination Location box shown in Figure 1-5 on page 1-6, select the destination folder for the Multi Host software files and click Next >. 4. In the Start Copying Files box shown in Figure 1-6 on page 1-7, click Next > to begin copying the files into the destination folder. 5. In the InstallShield Wizard Complete box shown in Figure 1-8 on page 1-9, click Finish. D.4 UPGRADING THE DATABASES 1. To install the Multi Host Database Upgrade utility, double-click Setup.exe. 2. The prerequisite .NET Framework 2.0 is installed first. After it is installed (a few minutes later), click Next. 3. Choose the destination folder for the installation. 4. Click Next to begin the installation of the Multi Host Database Upgrade utility. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 D-3 Appendix D • Database Upgrade 5. Click Close to complete the installation. 6. Click Start and move the cursor onto Programs then GE Energy then Multi Host Database Upgrade. The Database Upgrade window shown in Figure D-1 on page D-4 is displayed. Figure D-1 - Database Upgrade Window 7. In Select Upgrade Type, check [] Host, Server, or Host and Server. 8. In Select Multi Host Versions, use the drop-down lists to choose: • From Version: The old Multi Host version for which the databases have been saved. • To Version: The version of the newly installed Multi Host application. 9. D-4 Click the first Browse to select the location of the TransDB.mdb database (backed up in Section D.1 on page D-2). Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Error Messages 10. Click the second Browse to select the location of the HistoryDB.mdb database (backed up in Section D.1 on page D-2). 11. Click the third Browse to select the location of the GECommServerDB.mdb database (backed up in Section D.1 on page D-2). 12. Click the fourth Browse to select the destination folder for the newly installed Multi Host software files. 13. Click Upgrade. The database upgrade process begins. If successful, a message is displayed and the application closes. 14. Click Close. 15. Once the database has been upgraded, connect to the Device(s) at least once in order to view the data in Offline mode. Otherwise the default data will be shown. 16. Once the new firmware has been installed, sometimes the configuration data reinitializes to default data. In this case, the user has to reset back the values by using either the Multi Host application or the Device’s keypad. D.5 ERROR MESSAGES The Multi Host Database Upgrade tool can displays various error messages: • In step 8 on page D-4, if the selected From Version or To Version and the selected TransDB.mdb database file versions are not equal, then one of the following messages is displayed: – The selected ‘From Version’ and Trans database versions are not equal. Check the selected database file and ‘From Version’. – The selected ‘To Version’ and Trans database versions are not equal. Check the selected database file and ‘To Version’. • In step 8 on page D-4, if From Version and To Version are equal, then the message The Multi Host ‘From Version’ and ‘To Version’ cannot be the same. is displayed. • In step 9 on page D-4 to step 12 on page D-5, if one of the fields is left blank and Upgrade is clicked, then one of the following messages is displayed: – The Trans Database file path is required. – The History Database file path is required. – The Communication Server Database file path is required. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 D-5 Appendix D • Database Upgrade – The Multi Host installation directory path is required. • In step 9 on page D-4 to step 11 on page D-5, if at least one record exists in the installed version of the three databases, the upgrade process cannot proceed further. One of the following messages is then displayed: – The installed Trans database is not a fresh database. There are few records in the database. The upgrade is not possible. – The installed History database is not a fresh database. There are few records in the database. The upgrade is not possible. – The installed Communication Server database is not a fresh database. There are few records in the database. The upgrade is not possible. • In step 9 on page D-4 to step 12 on page D-5, if the installation path is incorrect or if any of the three databases is not found (as per upgrade type selected) in the installation directory provided, the upgrade process cannot proceed further. The message D:\Program Files\GE Energy\Multi Host is not a valid Multi Host installation path. Please provide valid installation path for Multi Host application. is then displayed. • Should the process fail during the upgrade of any of the three databases, then one of the following messages is displayed: – Upgrade of Trans database has failed. – Upgrade of History database has failed. – Upgrade of Server database has failed. • If a database is already upgraded and if the user tries to upgrade it again, then the message The database is already upgraded. is displayed. D.6 LOG FILE During the upgrade process, a log file is created and contains all success and failure messages. The log file can be found in the path of the Multi Host Database Upgrade application. The default folder is C:\Program Files\GE Energy\Multi Host Database Upgrade Utility. Should the upgrade process fail, then the log file can be used to check what caused the failure. D-6 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Appendix E Alarm Messages Table E-1 on page E-1 presents the list of all alarm messages that can be displayed by the Hydran M2 or the Intellix MO150 and that can appear on the Multi Host software. Note: Some model-related alarms can only be generated if two specific models are enabled. Table E-1 - Alarm Messages on the Hydran M2 or Intellix MO150 Display and on the Multi Host Software Alarm Name Alarm Message on the Hydran M2 or Intellix MO150 Display Alarm Message on the Multi Host Software Hydran Level Hi Alarm Tank#1 Hydran Lvl Hi Alarm Tank #1 Hydran Level Hi Alarm Hydran Level Hi-Hi Alarm Tank#1 Hydran Lvl Hi-Hi Alr Tank #1 Hydran Level Hi-Hi Alarm Hydran Hourly Trend Hi Alarm Tank#1 Hydran Hr.Tr. Hi Alarm Tank #1 Hydran Hourly Trend Hi Alarm Hydran Hourly Trend Hi-Hi Alarm Tank#1 Hydran Hr.Tr. H-H Alr Tank #1 Hydran Hourly Trend Hi-Hi Alarm Hydran Daily Trend Hi Alarm Tank#1 Hydran Dy.Tr. Hi Alr Tank #1 Hydran Daily Trend Hi Alarm Hydran Daily Trend Hi-Hi Alarm Tank#1 Hydran Dy.Tr. H-H Alr Tank #1 Hydran Daily Trend Hi-Hi Alarm %RH Level Hi Alarm Tank#1 %RH Hi Alarm Tank #1 %RH Level Hi Alarm %RH Level Hi-Hi Alarm Tank#1 %RH Hi-Hi Alarm Tank #1 %RH Level Hi-Hi Alarm H2O PPM Level Hi Alarm Tank#1 H2O PPM Hi Alarm Tank #1 H2O PPM Level Hi Alarm H2O PPM Level Hi-Hi Alarm Tank#1 H2O PPM Hi-Hi Alarm Tank #1 H2O PPM Level Hi-Hi Alarm %RH Hourly Average Hi Alarm Tank#1 %RH Avg.Hi Alarm Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 Tank #1 %RH Hourly Average Hi Alarm E-1 Appendix E • Alarm Messages Alarm Message on the Hydran M2 or Intellix MO150 Display Alarm Message on the Multi Host Software %RH Hourly Average Hi-Hi Alarm Tank#1 %RH Avg. Hi-Hi Alr Tank #1 %RH Hourly Average Hi-Hi Alarm H2O PPM Hourly Average Hi Alarm Tank#1 H2O PPM Avg. Hi Alr Tank #1 H2O PPM Hourly Average Hi Alarm H2O PPM Hourly Average Hi-Hi Alarm Tank#1 H2O PPM Av. H-H Alr Tank #1 H2O PPM Hourly Average Hi-Hi Alarm Hydran Sensor Temp Low Alarm Sens. #1 S. Temp Low Alarm Sensor #1 Hydran Sensor Temp Low Alarm Alarm Name Hydran Sensor Temp Hi Alarm Sens. #1 S. Temp Hi Alarm Sensor #1 Hydran Sensor Temp Hi Alarm Hydran Sensor Temp Input Fault Sens. #1 S. Temp Input Fault Sensor #1 Hydran Sensor Temp Input Fault Base Plate Temperature Low Alarm Sens. #1 B.P.Temp Low Alarm Sensor #1 Base Plate Temperature Low Alarm Base Plate Temperature Hi Alarm Sens. #1 B.P. Temp Hi Alarm Sensor #1 Base Plate Temperature Hi Alarm Base Plate Temperature Input Fault Sens. #1 B.P. Temp Input Fault Sensor #1 Base Plate Temperature Input Fault Battery Low-Low Alarm Battery L-Low Alarm Battery Low-Low Alarm Battery Low Alarm Battery Low Alarm Battery Low Alarm (An. User Defined #1) Low-Low Alarm AnUsrDf#1 LL Alr An. User Defined #1 Low-Low Alarm (An. User Defined #1) Low Alarm AnUsrDf#1 Low Alr An. User Defined #1 Low Alarm (An. User Defined #1) Hi Alarm AnUsrDf#1 Hi Alr An. User Defined #1 High Alarm (An. User Defined #1) Hi-Hi Alarm AnUsrDf#1 HH Alr An. User Defined #1 High-High Alarm (An. User Defined #1) Input Fault Alarm AnUsrDf#1 Inp. Fault An. User Defined #1 Input Fault Alarm (An. User Defined #2) Low-Low Alarm AnUsrDf#2 LL Alr An. User Defined #2 Low-Low Alarm E-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Alarm Name (An. User Defined #2) Low Alarm Alarm Message on the Hydran M2 or Intellix MO150 Display AnUsrDf#2 Low Alr Alarm Message on the Multi Host Software An. User Defined #2 Low Alarm (An. User Defined #2) Hi Alarm AnUsrDf#2 Hi Alr An. User Defined #2 High Alarm (An. User Defined #2) Hi-Hi Alarm AnUsrDf#2 HH Alr An. User Defined #2 High-High Alarm (An. User Defined #2) Input Fault Alarm AnUsrDf#2 Inp. Fault An. User Defined #2 Input Fault Alarm (An. User Defined #3) Low-Low Alarm AnUsrDf#3 LL Alr An. User Defined #3 Low-Low Alarm (An. User Defined #3) Low Alarm AnUsrDf#3 Low Alr An. User Defined #3 Low Alarm (An. User Defined #3) Hi Alarm AnUsrDf#3 Hi Alr An. User Defined #3 High Alarm (An. User Defined #3) Hi-Hi Alarm AnUsrDf#3 HH Alr An. User Defined #3 High-High Alarm (An. User Defined #3) Input Fault Alarm AnUsrDf#3 Inp. Fault An. User Defined #3 Input Fault Alarm (An. User Defined #4) Low-Low Alarm AnUsrDf#4 LL Alr An. User Defined #4 Low-Low Alarm (An. User Defined #4) Low Alarm AnUsrDf#4 Low Alr An. User Defined #4 Low Alarm (An. User Defined #4) Hi Alarm AnUsrDf#4 Hi Alr An. User Defined #4 High Alarm (An. User Defined #4) Hi-Hi Alarm AnUsrDf#4 HH Alr An. User Defined #4 High-High Alarm (An. User Defined #4) Input Fault Alarm AnUsrDf#4 Inp. Fault An. User Defined #4 Input Fault Alarm Top Oil Temperature Input Fault Alarm Top Oil Input Fault Top Oil Temperature Input Fault Alarm Top Oil Temperature Hi-Hi Alarm Top Oil Hi-Hi Alarm Top Oil Temperature Hi Alarm Top Oil Temperature Hi Alarm Top Oil Hi Alarm Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 Top Oil Temperature Hi-Hi Alarm E-3 Appendix E • Alarm Messages Alarm Name Alarm Message on the Hydran M2 or Intellix MO150 Display Alarm Message on the Multi Host Software Winding Hot-Spot Temperature WHST Hi-Hi Alarm Hi-Hi Alarm Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Hi-Hi Alarm Winding Hot-Spot Temperature WHST Hi Alarm Hi Alarm Winding Hot-Spot Temperature Hi Alarm Hydran Sensor Cable Open Alarm Sens. #1 Hyd. C.Open Alarm Sensor #1 Hydran Sensor Cable Open Alarm Hydran Sensor Cable Short Alarm Sens. #1 Hyd. C.Short Alarm Sensor #1 Hydran Sensor Cable Short Alarm Hydran Replace Sensor Soon Alarm Sens. #1 Hyd. Rep.S.Soon Alr Sensor #1 Hydran Replace Sensor Soon Alarm Hydran Replace Sensor Now Alarm Sens. #1 Hyd. Rep.S.Now Alr Sensor #1 Hydran Replace Sensor Now Alarm Sensor Card #1 Comm. Error Alarm S.Card #1 Com Err.Alarm Sensor Card #1 Comm. Error Alarm OLTC Short Term Temperature OLTC Diff. S.T. H-H Alr Differential Hi-Hi Alarm OLTC Short Term Temperature Differential Hi-Hi Alarm OLTC Short Term Temperature OLTC Diff. S.T. Hi Alr Differential Hi Alarm OLTC Short Term Temperature Differential Hi Alarm OLTC Long Term Temperature OLTC Diff. L.T. H-H Alr Differential Hi-Hi Alarm OLTC Long Term Temperature Differential Hi-Hi Alarm OLTC Long Term Temperature OLTC Diff. L.T. Hi Alr Differential Hi Alarm OLTC Long Term Temperature Differential Hi Alarm Number of operations since last Op. Cnt. S. Maint. Alr Maintenance Alarm Number of operations since last Maintenance Alarm Elapsed Time since last Maintenance Alarm Time since Maint. Alr Elapsed Time since last Maintenance Alarm Days Elapsed since last Reversing Switch Operation Alarm Day s. Rev. Sw. Op. Alr Days Elapsed since last Reversing Switch Operation Alarm Maximum Number of Tap Operations per Hour Alarm Max Tap Op. per HrAlr Maximum Number of Tap Operations per Hour Alarm Maximum Number of Tap Operations per Day Alarm Max Tap Op. per DyAlr Maximum Number of Tap Operations per Day Alarm E-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Alarm Name Alarm Message on the Hydran M2 or Intellix MO150 Display Alarm Message on the Multi Host Software Ambient Temperature Input Fault Alarm Ambient Input Fault Ambient Temperature Input Fault Alarm Cooling Efficiency Index Alarm Cool. Eff. Index Alr Cooling Efficiency Index Alarm Bottom Oil Temperature Input Fault Alarm Bottom Oil Input Fault Bottom Oil Temperature Input Fault Alarm Water-Oil Condensation Temperature Alarm Tank#1 W-Oil Cond. Temp Alr Tank #1 Water-Oil Condensation Temperature Alarm Bubbling Temperature Margin Alarm Bubbling Temp M. Alr Bubbling Temperature Margin Alarm (Dg. User Defined #1) Alarm DgUsrDf #1 Alarm Dg. User Defined #1 (Dg. User Defined #2) Alarm DgUsrDf #2 Alarm Dg. User Defined #2 (Dg. User Defined #3) Alarm DgUsrDf #3 Alarm Dg. User Defined #3 (Dg. User Defined #4) Alarm DgUsrDf #4 Alarm Dg. User Defined #4 Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 E-5 Appendix E • Alarm Messages PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK E-6 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Appendix F Glossary A: Ampere ac: Alternating Current Adaptor (brass): Adaptor used to mount a Device (specifically its sensor) onto a valve of the electrical equipment to monitor (typically a transformer) Alarm: Operating condition occurring when a data point value exceeds the parameter’s alarm set-point Alarm Contact: Terminal used as interface between the alarm relays of a Device and any SCADA system (alarm panel, etc.) Analog Output: Analog signal that is proportional to a reading performed by a Device Analog Signal: Electronic signal that can represent an infinite range of numbers (as opposed to digital signal) Analysis: Algorithm applied to data points for the purpose of calculating features that are then applied to rules ANSI: American National Standards Institute, a non-governmental organization that develops and publishes standards for voluntary use in the United States A RMS: Ampere Root Mean Square ASCII: American Standard Code for Information Interchange, using seven bits to represent all uppercase and lowercase characters, numbers, punctuation marks and other characters ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials (United States) AWG: American Wire Gauge (United States) Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 F-1 Appendix F • Glossary B.P.: Base Plate bps: Bit Per Second CD-ROM: Compact Disc - Read-Only Memory CE: European Conformity CH4: Methane C2H2: Acetylene C2H4: Ethylene C2H6: Ethane Channel: Path along which data passes in the form of electrical signals CO: Carbon monOxide CO2: Carbon diOxide COM: Serial COMmunication port on a PC Combustible Gas: Fault gas in the dielectric oil of a transformer Cooling Bank: A group of fans or pumps that are energized together when prompted by the cooling control system. A transformer with two cooling banks has three cooling stages because the case of natural cooling with no fans or pumps is also considered. Cooling Mode: Also called “cooling type,” or “cooling classes” in IEEE. Defines the means of cooling used on a certain cooling stage. For liquid-immersed transformers, this identification is expressed by a four-letter code. These designations are consistent with IEC 76-2 (1993): • The first letter indicates the internal cooling medium in contact with the windings as follows: – O: Mineral oil or synthetic insulating liquid with a fire point < 300 °C – K: Insulating liquid with a fire point > 300 °C – L: Insulating liquid with no measurable fire point F-2 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 • The second letter indicates the mean of circulation of that fluid: – N: Natural convection flow of oil through windings and radiators – F: Forced convection flow through cooling equipment (for example, coolant pumps), natural convection flow in windings – D: Forced circulation through cooling equipment, directed from the cooling equipment into at least the main windings • The third letter refers to the type of cooling medium outside the tank: – A: Air – W: Water • The fourth letter designates the circulation mean of the outside cooling medium: – N: Natural air circulation – F: Forced circulation of air (with fans) or forced circulation of water (with pumps) Cooling Stage: A transformer may have more than one cooling stages. The transformer nameplate lists the rated power and cooling mode designations for each rating in order of increasing power. The cooling mode designations are normally listed in order with a diagonal slash separating each one. CPU: Central Processing Unit CSA: Canadian Standards Association CT: Current Transducer CT Configuration: In most cases the load is measured with a single CT, even for threephase transformers. In some applications with significant load unbalance, one CT is used on each phase. The Intellix MO150 is capable of handling both systems but it must be stated which configuration is applied. In most cases the current is measured with a clamp-on current transducer fitted on the CT cable in the transformer control cabinet. Both CT ratio and transducer ratio must be considered in the configuration of these analog inputs. Daily Trend: Variation of a level during an adjustable period of time calculated in days dc: Direct Current Device: Hydran M2 or Intellix MO150 DGA: Dissolved Gas Analysis Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 F-3 Appendix F • Glossary Diagnostic: Identification of specific malfunctions of an electrical apparatus Digital Output: Output that provides a digital signal derived from the digital information within the instrument Digital Signal: Electronic signal that can only represent discrete numbers (as opposed to analog signal) DIN: Deutsches Institut für Normung, a german standards institute DNP: Distributed Network Protocol Download: Transferring data stored in the memory of a Device’s PLC to the Multi Host PC’s database DPR: Diagnostic, Prognostic and Recommendations module, which provides information and advices for each alarm condition that can be triggered in a Device DVM: Digital VoltMeter EC: Electronic Controller, the Intel Pentium* PC responsible for data acquisition, transfer, storage, interpretation and communications EEC: European Economic Community Embedded Software: Small program that runs inside a Device. It monitors alarm conditions, triggers alarms, displays the readings, allows setting and modifying the value of every operational parameter, and more. EMI: ElectroMagnetic Interference End User: Commercial client for General Electric Canada Error: Deviation (difference or ratio) of a measurement from its true value Esc: ESCape key on a Device’s keypad ESD: ElectroStatic Discharge F-4 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 Extended Menu: Menu of a Device’s embedded software that gives access to all operation parameters and commands (including those of the Main Menu) Fault: Indication (other than diagnostics) issued by the hardware or software that an anomaly exists in a Device FCC: Federal Communications Commission, the United States government agency responsible for ensuring that phone lines are being used correctly and that radio interference is at acceptable levels Feedback: A means of providing indication of operation either by measured values or contact status (on/off) FIFO: First In, First Out. The first data into a memory buffer is the first data out of the buffer. Gas Level: Composite value of four dissolved gases in transformer oil, measured by a Hydran sensor GE: General Electric GUI: Graphical User Interface, the graphical layout designed to enable user interaction with a Device. It enables information to be passed between a user and hardware or software components of a computer system via graphical symbols (icons, buttons and menus) located on a screen, accessed using a mouse, keyboard, keypad, etc. H or Hi: High alarm H2: Hydrogen Hardware: The physical parts of a computer-controlled system, such as circuit boards, chassis, peripheral devices, cables, etc. HH or Hi-Hi: High-High alarm History File: Either one of the groups of data (Short Term, Long Term, Events, Service and Digital Events) that are recorded automatically and periodically and stored in a Device’s memory Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 F-5 Appendix F • Glossary HMI: Human/Machine Interface H2O: Water Host Computer: IBM PC (or compatible) connected remotely to a Device or a network of Devices and running the Multi Host software Hourly Trend: Variation of a level during an adjustable period of time calculated in hours HV: High Voltage H Winding: High-voltage winding Hydran M2: Intelligent transmitter, an IED that uses an electrochemical gas detector to measure moisture and a composite value of four dissolved gases in transformer oil Hz: HertZ, a unit of frequency equal to a cycle per second ID: IDentification IEC: International Electrotechnical Commission IED: Intelligent Electronic Device IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (United States) in: INch Intellix MO150: Dynamic, adaptive, intelligent, interactive and integrating system to monitor, manage and control the cooling system of medium-sized power transformers I/O: Input/Output, two of the three activities (input, processing and output) characterizing a computer. Refers to the complementary tasks of gathering data for the microprocessor to work with and making the results available to the user through communication channels such as the display, a disk drive or a printer. IP: Internet Protocol. The IP address identifies a computer connected to the Internet. Isolated Output: Output signal where a common reference is not connected to either input terminal F-6 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 kVA: KiloVolt-Ampere L or Lo: Low alarm Lab Data: Manually-entered gas sample data obtained from laboratory results LAN: Local Area Network, a group of computers and other devices dispersed over a relatively-limited area and connected by a communications link enabling any device to interact and share with any other device or resource on the network. Usually, there is one computer that controls all peripherals (such as printers and a hard disk drive). The other computers are linked to the controlling computer, which lets the other computers take turns using the peripherals. Laptop Computer: IBM PC (or compatible) connected locally to a Device or a network of Devices and running the Multi Host software LCD: Liquid Crystal Display, a type of flat-panel display commonly used on laptops or PC’s LED: Light-Emitting Diode LL or Lo-Lo: Low-Low alarm Local Network: Daisy chain of Devices connected together using an RS-485 link in order to be monitored locally or remotely (via modem) using the Multi Host software Local Site: User location where the data of the remote site is being analyzed LV: Low Voltage mA: MilliAmpere mAdc: MilliAmpere Direct Current Main Menu: Menu of a Device’s embedded software that gives access to the most frequently used operation parameters and commands Mbps: MegaByte Per Second Menu: Group of parameters and values accessed through a hierarchical, treelike structure Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 F-7 Appendix F • Glossary MHz: MegaHertZ, a unit of frequency equal to one million cycles per second Modbus: Transmission protocol developed by Gould Modicon (now Schneider Electric) for process control systems. This simple, flexible, publicly-published protocol allows devices to exchange discrete and analog data. Modem: MOdulator/DEModulator, a communication device connecting data terminal equipment to an analog or digital line. A modem transforms digital signals into an analog signal suitable for transmission over telephone lines. This is the heart of computer telecommunications. The main factor that differentiates modems is their speed, measured in bps or bauds. MOV: Metal Oxide Varistor Multi Host: Microsoft Windows software that communicates, through an RS-232 serial communication link or a modem, with one or several Devices using the host or laptop computer. It allows a user to set operational parameters, survey alarm status, etc. MVA: MegaVolt-Ampere N2: Nitrogen NC: Normally Closed Network: See Local Network NO: Normally Open Null Modem: A special connection between two computers that makes them think they are hooked up to a modem, so that the two computers can communicate with each other Number of Cooling Stages: This information is used in the Cooling Control model. Transformers usually have three cooling stages, for example, ONAF / OFAF / OFAF. Some transformers might have only one or two cooling stages. O2: Oxygen ODAF: Oil-Directed, Air-Forced ODWF: Oil-Directed, Water-Forced F-8 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 OFAF: Oil-Forced, Air-Forced OFWF: Oil-Forced, Water-Forced Oil Sample: Small quantity of oil, representative of the oil contained in the transformer OLTC: On-Load Tap Changer ONAF: Oil-Natural, Air-Forced ONAN: Oil-Natural, Air-Natural PC: Personal Computer, a computer typically based on an Intel microprocessor and capable of receiving network cards, modems, data acquisition boards, etc. PCB: Printed Circuit Board PD: Partial Discharge PDF: Portable Document Format PLC: Programmable Logic Controller P/N: Part Number POT: POTentiometer ppm: Part Per Million, representing the concentration of a gas in transformer oil PT: Potential Transformer p.u.: Per Unit PVC: PolyVinyl Chloride, a plastic used for cable insulation RAM: Random Access Memory, a semiconductor-based memory that can be read and written by the microprocessor or other digital hardware devices Range: A continuous band of signal values that can be measured or sourced. In bipolar instruments, the range includes positive and negative values. Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 F-9 Appendix F • Glossary RAS: Remote Access Service, a network system service enabling computers to connect to remote computers or networks via a communications line Rated Current: Transformer rated current, on the top-cooling mode. The rated current is needed for each winding being monitored. This value is expressed in amperes. Rated Hot-Spot Temperature Rise Above Top Oil: In the Intellix MO150, the Winding Hot-Spot Temperature model is based on the measured value of top oil temperature and a computed temperature rise for the winding hot-spot. The rated hot-spot rise above top oil (expressed in °C) is the value applicable on the top-cooling mode at rated current. On recent transformers, the calculated value is usually provided on the Test Report. On older units, the manufacturer can provide a computed value. If neither is available, a default value between 20 and 30 can be used, although this approach may reduce the validity of the calculated hot-spot temperature. Different values can be entered for each winding. RDBMS: Relational DataBase Management System Real-Time: Pertaining to a system or operating mode under which computation is performed during the actual time when an external process occurs, instead of being accumulated and processed at a later time. The computation results can therefore be used to control, monitor, or respond in a timely manner to the external process. Remote: A connection using modems between a Device and the host computer through a public or private telephone system Remote Site: Location of a Device Repeatability: The ability of an instrument to measure the same input to the same value over a short period of time and over a narrow temperature range Response Time: For a measuring instrument, designates the time between the application of a step input signal and the indication of its magnitude within a rated accuracy. For a sourcing instrument, designates the time between a programmed change and the availability of the value at its output terminals. RFI: Radio-Frequency Interference %RH: Relative Humidity in % F-10 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 RMS: Root Mean Square ROC: Rate Of Change ROM: Read-Only Memory RS-232: Specific type of port on the back of some computers, or peripherals such as modems. It has 9 or 25 pins. RS-232 Serial Communication Link: Cable that connects a Device or a network of Devices to a laptop computer RS-485 Local Network Link: Cable that connects Devices together to form a local network RTC: Real-Time Clock RTD: Resistive Thermal Detector RTDB: Real-Time DataBase RTU: Remote Terminal Unit SCADA: Supervisory Control And Data Acquisition, identifying the numerous devices (control panel, alarm panel, retransmission unit, display, terminal, data recorder, external detection device, etc.) on which can be connected the components of a Device SH or SHLD: Cable SHieLD S/N: Serial Number SP: Set Point SPDT: Single Pole Double Throw SQL: Structured Query Language SSR: Solid-State Relay Submenu: A branch of the treelike structure of a menu Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 F-11 Appendix F • Glossary TB: Terminal Block TCP: Tap Changer Position TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol, a networking protocol originally developed by the United States Department of Defense and implemented for communications between computers in LAN’s and WAN’s. The IP is the method by which data is sent from one computer to another on the Internet. Each piece of data sent over the Internet gets divided into little chunks called packets; the IP delivers them and the TCP puts them back in the right order. TDCG: Total Dissolved Combustible Gas TDG: Total Dissolved Gas TDM: Time Division Multiplexing, a method of coding and transmitting information Teflon: polyTEtraFLuOrethyleNe TM: TradeMark Transformer Oil: Highly-refined, mineral oil used as a dielectric and heat transfer fluid in transformers Transformer Phase Number: States whether the transformer is a three-phase unit (3) or a single-phase unit (1) USB: Universal Serial Bus UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply User: Person operating a Device User-Friendly: An interface designed to simplify the use of an application User Interface: The means (display, keypad, push-button, etc.) used to achieve communication between the user and a Device µV: Microvolt F-12 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 V: Volt VA: Volt-Ampere Vac: Volt Alternating Current Vdc: Volt Direct Current VDE: Verein Deutscher Elektrotechniker, a german standards institute V-I: Voltage to current V RMS: Volt Root Mean Square W: Watt WAN: Wide Area Network, a communication network using telephone lines or other telecommunication devices to link computers in geographically-separated areas Watchdog: Process used periodically to test if a computerized system is operating properly WHST: Winding Hot-Spot Temperature % w/w: Percentage Weight by Weight X Winding: Low-voltage winding Y Winding: Tertiary winding Part 18415 Rev. 7, December 2010 F-13 Appendix F • Glossary PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK F-14 Rev. 7, December 2010 Part 18415 GE Energy Services Digital Energy 179 Brunswick Blvd. Pointe-Claire QC H9R 5N2 Canada T +1 514 694 3637 F +1 514 694 9245 [email protected] www.ge.com/energy GE Energy Services Digital Energy Customer Service Center (24 hours a day, 365 days a year): T 800 361 3652 (United States and Canada) T +1 403 214 4600 (worldwide) [email protected] imagination at work
![[ Graphics Card- 710-1-SL]](http://s2.studylib.es/store/data/005308161_1-3d44ecb8407a561d085071135c866b6c-300x300.png)
